2002 quest owner's manual

Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of newNISSAN owners. This vehicle is deliveredto you with confidence. It was producedusing the latest techniques and strict qualitycontrol.

This manual was prepared to help youunderstand the operation and maintenanceof your vehicle so that you may enjoy manymiles of driving pleasure. Please readthrough this manual before operating yourvehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warrantiescovering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide” explainsdetails about maintaining and servicingyour vehicle. Additionally, a separateCustomer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S.only) will explain how to resolve anyconcerns you may have with your ve-hicle, as well as clarify your rights underyour state’s lemon law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your ve-hicle best. When you require any service orhave any questions, they will be glad toassist you with the extensive resourcesavailable to them.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELYBefore driving your vehicle read this own-er’s manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance re-quirements, assisting you in the safeoperation of your vehicle.

WARNINGIMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!● NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.● ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-

its and never drive too fast for con-ditions.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts andappropriate child restraint systems.Pre-teen children should be seatedin the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety fea-tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manualfor important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its perfor-mance, safety or durability, and mayeven violate governmental regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from modificationsmay not be covered under NISSANwarranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. Therefore,you may find some information that doesnot apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect at thetime of printing. NISSAN reserves the rightto change specifications or design withoutnotice and without obligation.

The inside pages of this manual containa minimum of 50% recycled fibers,including 10% post-consumer fibers.

Z X

You will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause death orserious personal injury. To avoid orreduce the risk, the procedures mustbe followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damage toyour vehicle. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedcarefully.

If you see this symbol, it means ‘‘Do not dothis’’ or ‘‘Do not let this happen.’’

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNINGEngine Exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and certain vehicle componentscontain or emit chemicals known toState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductiveharm.

© 2001 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.GARDENA, CALIFORNIA

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in any form, orby any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without theprior written permission of Nissan NorthAmerica, Inc., Gardena, California

The inside pages of this manual containa minimum of 50% recycled fibers,including 10% post-consumer fibers.

APD1005

IMPORTANT INFORMATIONABOUT THIS MANUAL

Z X

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedicationto produce the finest in safe, reliable and eco-nomical transportation. Your vehicle is the prod-uct of a successful worldwide company thatmanufactures cars and trucks in over 17 coun-tries and distributes them in 170 nations.

NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufacturedby Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded inTokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world-wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largestautomaker in the world. In addition to cars andtrucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marineengines, boats and other diversified products.

NISSAN has made a substantial and growinginvestment in North America. NISSAN’s commit-ment is nearly $4 billion dollars in capital invest-ments in facilities across the continent. Some ofthe facilities include the Nissan Manufacturingfacility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling

design at Nissan Design America, Inc. in SanDiego, California, and engineering at NissanTechnical Center North America in FarmingtonHills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employsnearly 18,000 people throughout the UnitedStates, Canada, and Mexico. An additional71,000 people work for the 1,500 NISSAN andINFINITI dealers across North America.NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to theCanadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its sup-pliers and over 140 dealers employ approxi-mately 4,500 people. These include companyemployees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers allacross Canada. In addition, many Canadianswork for companies that supply NISSAN andNISSAN dealers with materials and servicesranging from the operation of port facilities andtransportation services, to the supply of lubri-cants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics andcomputers in automobiles, and has led the indus-try in improving both performance and fuel effi-ciency through new engine designs and the useof synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight.The company has also developed ways to buildquality into its vehicles at each stage of theproduction process, both through extensive useof automation and — most importantly —through an awareness that people are the cen-tral element in quality control.

From the time the parts arrived from our suppli-ers until you took delivery of your new NISSAN,dozens of checks were made to ensure that onlythe best job was being done in producing anddelivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes greatcare to ensure that when you take your NISSANto your dealer for maintenance, the service techni-cian will perform his work according to the qualitystandards that have been established by thefactory.

Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. Asyou know, seat belts are an integral part of thesafety systems that will help protect you and yourpassengers in the event of a sudden stop or anaccident. We urge you to use the seat belts everytime you drive the vehicle.

The NISSAN story of growth and achievementreflects our major goal: to provide you, ourcustomer, with a vehicle that is built with qualityand craftsmanship — a product that we can beproud to build and you can be proud to own.

WFW0002

Z X

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAMNISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and yourNISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and serviceneeds.

However, if there is something that yourNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with oryou would like to provide NISSAN directlywith comments or questions, please con-tact our (NISSAN’s) Consumer Affairs De-partment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland and Alaskacustomers

1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Hawaii customers(808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number)

For CANADIAN customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:— Your name, address, and telephonenumber— Vehicle identification number (Attachedto the top of the instrument panel on thedriver’s side.)— Date of purchase— Current odometer reading— Your NISSAN dealer’s name— Your comments or questions

OR

you may write to NISSAN with the information

on the left at:

For U.S. mainland and Alaska custom-ers

Nissan North America Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Hawaii customersNissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii2880 Kilihau St.Honolulu, Hawaii 96819

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Z X

Table ofContents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental airbag systems

Seats ......................................................................1-2Front manual seat adjustment...........................1-3Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped)..................................................1-4Three-passenger seat adjustment ....................1-7Head restraint adjustment ...............................1-10Armrests ..........................................................1-11Underseat storage tray....................................1-11Flexible seating................................................1-12Tabletop seats.................................................1-18

Seats/floor mats ...................................................1-19Seating arrangements .....................................1-19Seat positions..................................................1-20Floor mat positions..........................................1-27

Supplemental restraint system.............................1-31Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem .............................................................1-31Supplemental air bag warning labels ..............1-37Supplemental air bag warning light.................1-37

Seat belts .............................................................1-39Precautions on seat belt usage ......................1-39Child safety......................................................1-41

Pregnant women .............................................1-42Injured persons................................................1-42Three-point type seat belt with retractor .........1-42Three-point type seat belt with retractorfor second row bucket seats ...........................1-45Three-passenger bench seat in thesecond row position.........................................1-49Three-passenger bench seat ..........................1-50Two-point type seat belt withoutretractor (center of rear seat) ..........................1-51Seat belt extenders .........................................1-53Seat belt maintenance ....................................1-54

Child restraints .....................................................1-54Precautions on child restraints ........................1-54Installation on three-passenger benchseat center position .........................................1-56Installation on second and third rowoutboard positions ...........................................1-59Installation on front passenger seat ................1-64

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether forChildren) system ..................................................1-67Child restraint with top tether strap......................1-68

Z X

Installation on second row bench orbucket seat ......................................................1-69Installation on three-passenger benchseat in second row ..........................................1-72

Installation on three-passenger benchseat in third row...............................................1-72Integrated child safety seats(if so equipped)................................................1-73

Z X

WARNING● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt willnot be against your body. In an acci-dent you could be thrown into it andreceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide under thelap belt and receive serious internalinjuries.

● For most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback in the seat and adjust the seatproperly. See ‘‘Precautions on SeatBelt Usage’’ later in this section.

ARS1131

SEATS

1-2 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Z X

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

WARNING● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securelylocked.

Forward and backwardRotate the lever up while you slide the seatforward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up andlean back. To bring the seatback forwardagain, pull the lever up and move your bodyforward. The seatback moves forward. Re-lease the lever to lock the seatback in position.

ARS1211

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-3

Z X

FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

WARNING● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

● Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls.Unattended children could becomeinvolved in serious accidents.

For memory seat and mirror informationsee ‘‘Memory driver seat and mirrors’’ in the‘‘Pre-driving checks and adjustments’’ sec-tion.

Operating tips● The motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops dur-ing operation, wait 30 seconds, then re-activate the switch.

● Do not operate the power support seatfor a long period of time when the engineis off. This discharges the battery.


Z X

Forward and backwardTo move the seat forward, push the powerslide switch forward. To move the seatbackward, push the power slide switchbackward. Release the switch to stop themovement of the seat.

RecliningTo recline the seat back, push the powerrecliner switch backward. To return to amore upright position, push the power re-cliner switch forward. Release the switch tostop the movement of the seatback.

ARS1212

ARS1120


Z X

Seat lifter (driver’s seat only)To raise the height of the seat, lift the powerseat height switch and release it when thedesired position is reached. To lower theheight of the seat, push the power seatheight switch down and release it when thedesired position is reached.

Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)

The lumbar support provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up ordown to adjust the seat lumbar area.

ARS1158 ARS1121


Z X

THREE-PASSENGER SEATADJUSTMENT

RecliningTo recline the three-passenger seat, lift upon the lever and lean back until the desiredposition is reached. To bring the seatbackforward, pull the lever up and lean yourbody forward.

WARNING● Do not recline the seatback while the

vehicle is moving.● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when


● For most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback in the seat and adjust the seatbelt properly. See ‘‘Precautions onseat belt usage’’ later in this section.


APD0852


Z X

SlidingBefore sliding the seat, fasten the centerbelt tongue to the center buckle and removethe appropriate floor mats.

1. Lift the seat cushion release lever.

2. Lift the seat cushion up into the lockedposition.

3. Lift the slide release lever and grasp thebar under the seat in the center.

4. Slide the seat until locked at a passengerseating position or a storage position.After the seat starts moving, release theslide lever. The seat latches at the nextlatching position. Continue to lift andrelease the slide lever until the desiredposition is obtained.

To lower the cushion, the seat must belocked at a passenger seating position. Liftthe seat cushion release lever and lower thecushion until locked.

The seat cushion cannot be lowered in astorage position. This prevents a pas-senger from using a seat or seat belt thatis out of a seating position.APD0853


Z X

The seating system allows great flexibility.Proper usage is important to your safety.

WARNING

● Do not slide the seat while the ve-hicle is moving.


● After sliding the seat, check that bothsides of the seat are locked securelyby attempting to move each side ofthe seat forward and backward. Thismust be done before the vehicle is

put into motion in order to preventunintended movement of the seat andpassenger injuries.

● Do not allow passengers to useseats placed in storage positions forthe seat belts will not protect theoccupants. Be sure to use the properseat belts for each seat location.Improper seat belt usage will in-crease the risk of severe injury in anaccident.

● When the vehicle is being used tocarry cargo, properly secure all cargoto help prevent it from sliding or shift-ing. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Be careful not to damage the seatbelt. Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on a seat that is in astorage position. It is not designedfor passengers. They could be in-jured in sudden braking or a collision.

● To prevent luggage or packagesfrom sliding forward during braking,

do not stack anything in the cargoarea higher than the seatbacks.

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these ar-eas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a seat belt prop-erly.

● Be sure to replace and repositionfloor mats as discussed in ‘‘Floormat positioning’’ in this section.

● The three-passenger sliding benchseat is not intended to be removedfrom the vehicle by consumers.However, if it must be removed, havea qualified person remove it. Thatperson should refer to the instruc-tions in the service manual. Whenseat is reinstalled, the attachingbolts must be tightened to the appro-priate torque specifications. Failure

ARS1196


Z X

to follow these instructions couldincrease the chance and/or severityof injury in an accident.

Cleaning the seat tracksThe seat tracks for the three-passengersliding bench seat should be cleaned peri-odically with a high-powered vacuumcleaner. Dirty seat tracks may reduce thesliding ability of the seat. A wet cleansingagent may be used if necessary, but theseat tracks must be thoroughly dried.

Use a cloth wrapped around a screwdriver(or similar object) to clean the seat tracks.Do not use your fingers to clean debris fromthe tracks.

Do not apply any type of lubricant to theseat tracks.

CAUTIONNever insert fingers into the seat trackrails. The rails may be sharp and couldcause injury.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUST-MENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. Tolower, push and hold the release button andpush the head restraint down.

The head restraints on the two-passengerbench seat equipped with the integratedchild safety seats are not adjustable orremovable.

Adjust the head restraints so the center islevel with the center of your ears.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide signifi-cant protection against injury in an ac-cident. Do not remove them. Check theadjustment after someone else usesthe seat.

Some seat arrangements may require re-moval of the head restraints when the seatis in a storage position and not to be used bypassengers.

PD1176M WRS0096


Z X

ARMRESTSTo use the armrests on any seat, pull themdown to the resting position.

UNDERSEAT STORAGE TRAYSome front passenger seats have an under-seat storage tray. Pull the tray out to ac-cess.

ARS1137 WRS0049


Z X

FLEXIBLE SEATING

Removing the second row benchseat

WARNING● Do not remove or install seats while

the vehicle is moving.● After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt willnot be against your body. In an acci-dent you could be thrown into it andreceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide under thelap belt and receive serious internalinjuries.


● When adjusting or moving any of theseats in your vehicle, do not use anyof the seat belt buckles, tongues, orwebbing to carry or move the seats.Lifting the seats by any of the seatbelts could damage them. Damagedseat belts should be replaced at anauthorized NISSAN dealer. Failure tofollow these instructions could in-crease the chance and/or severity ofinjury in an accident.

ARS1139


Z X

CAUTION● The seats are heavy. Two people

should remove or install them.

● Do not sit in seats that have beenremoved from the vehicle. They maytip over and you could be injured.

1. Detach the single window seat belttongue from the auxiliary buckle mountedto the side of the seat and store thetongue out of the way. For detailed infor-mation, see ‘‘Two buckle seat belt sys-tem for the second row bench seat’’ laterin this section.

2. Lift up the recliner lever.

3. Fold the seatback fully forward.

4. Unlock the seat legs at the two rear floorlatch levers by pulling up on the twostraps.

5. Lift the back of the seat.

6. Slide the seat rearward off the front an-chor positions.

Installing the second row benchseat

Clean the area around the seat leg flooranchors before installing the seat.

1. With the seatback fully folded, place theseat behind the floor anchors and catchthe seat leg hooks into each floor anchor.

2. Push down on the back of the seat tosecure the two rear floor latches.

3. Lift up the recliner lever and raise theseatback.

4. Rock the seat back and forth to be sure

all four seat legs are securely latched.

5. Insert the single window seat belt tongueinto the auxiliary buckle mounted to theside of the seat.

ARS1140


Z X

Removing second row bucket seats

WARNING● Do not remove or install seats while

the vehicle is moving.● After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securelylocked.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt willnot be against your body. In an acci-dent you could be thrown into it andreceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide under thelap belt and receive serious internalinjuries.


● When adjusting or moving any of theseats in your vehicle, do not use anyof the seat belt buckles, tongues, orwebbing to carry or move the seats.Lifting the seats by any of the seatbelts could damage them. Damagedseat belts should be replaced at yourNISSAN dealer. Failure to followthese instructions could increase thechance and/or severity of injury in anaccident.

CAUTION● The seats are heavy. Two people

should remove or install them.● Do not sit in seats that have been

removed from the vehicle. They maytip over and you could be injured.


Z X

1. Lift the recliner lever.

2. Fold the seatback fully forward.

ARS1141


Z X

3. Unlock the seat legs at the two rear floorlatch levers by pulling up on the twostraps.

4. Lift the back of the seat and slide itrearward off the front anchor positions.

ARS1143


Z X

Installing the second row bucketseats

Clean the area around the seat leg flooranchors before installing the seat.

1. With the seatback fully folded, place theseat behind the floor anchors and slideseat leg hooks so they catch into eachfloor anchor.

2. Push down on the rear of the seat tosecure the two rear floor latches.

3. Lift the recliner lever and raise the seat-back.

4. Rock the seat back and forth to be sure itis securely latched.

The second row bucket seats are notinterchangeable. If you are having diffi-culty installing the seats, you may havethem in the wrong location.

Second row passenger side bucketseatThe bucket seat near the passenger sidesliding door can be moved forward to alloweasier entry and exit for third seat passen-gers.

ARS1142 ARS1144


Z X

TABLETOP SEATS

The second and third row seats convert intotabletops with built-in cupholders. To usethe tabletop seats, lift up on the seatbackrelease lever and fold the seatback forward.

WARNING

● Never place hard items such as cof-fee mugs or drinking glasses on thetabletop seats when the vehicle ismoving. Any item can become a pro-jectile inside a vehicle involved in acollision. To help prevent personalinjury, never leave loose items onthe folded-down tabletop seats whenthe vehicle is moving.

● Do not use the tabletop and cupholder feature while the vehicle is inmotion unless you are properlyseated with your seat belt on.

ARS1138


Z X

There is also a lever behind the passengerbucket seat that allows third seat passen-gers to move the bucket seat forward with-out help from another passenger.

SEATING ARRANGEMENTSMany different arrangements for passengerseating or cargo hauling are available, asyou will see in the following illustrations. Thesecond row seats may be removed and thethird row seat may be moved forward to thesecond row seating position. The secondand third row seats have a fold-down table-top feature. This offers a variety of uses forthe vehicle when moving or stopped.

The illustrations shown reflect the differentseating positions available.

Before you begin to arrange the seats inyour vehicle, read all of the cautions andwarnings in this section, including theinformation on the removable floor mats.Also observe any labels that are in thevehicle.

LRS0050

SEATS/FLOOR MATS


Z X

WARNING● While the vehicle is in motion, pas-

sengers should always be seated ina forward facing direction in a seatwhich is properly secured and ad-justed. Seat belts should always beused. Sitting without a seat belt in aseat that is not properly secured inone of the locations shown in thischapter, or in a place without a seatand seat belt can result in personalinjury in a sudden stop or collision.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt willnot be against your body. In an acci-dent, you could be thrown into it andreceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide under thelap belt and receive serious internalinjuries.

● For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjust theseat belt properly.



● Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a seat belt prop-erly.

● Do not place hard items such ascoffee mugs or drinking glasses onthe tabletop seats when the vehicleis moving. Any item can become aprojectile inside a vehicle involved ina collision. To help prevent personalinjury, never leave loose items onthe fold-down tabletop seats whenthe vehicle is moving.

SEAT POSITIONS

With second row bench seatThe most common seating arrangement forseven passengers is with the three-passenger bench seat in seating position#1. This provides more leg room for thepassengers sitting in the third row.

APD0096


Z X

When more cargo area room is necessary,the three-passenger sliding bench seat canbe moved to seating position #2 or #3.These seating arrangements provide lessleg room for third row passengers, but morecargo room.

The fold-down tabletop seats in the secondand third rows provide a surface for eatingor playing games on long trips.

ARS1204 APD0042


Z X

If a considerable amount of cargo area isneeded, the seat cushion of the three-passenger sliding bench seat can be flippedup and the seat can be moved up to storageposition #2, just behind the second rowseat.

When maximum cargo area is needed andthere are no rear seat passengers, thesecond row seat can be removed and thethree-passenger sliding bench seat can bemoved up to storage position #1, just behindthe front seats.

The second row bench seat can be foldeddown to serve as a tabletop for passengerssitting in the three-passenger bench seat.

APD0043 APD0049 APD0044


Z X

The second and third row bench seats canbe folded down to tabletops.

To increase cargo area space, the secondrow bench seat can be removed and thethree-passenger sliding seat can be movedup to the second row position.

The third seat can be folded down into atabletop.

APD0045 APD0046 APD0047


Z X

With the third seat folded down and thesecond seat removed, cargo can be placedin between the front seats and the third rowseat. Passengers should not be allowedto ride in areas meant for cargo. Passen-gers should always be properly re-strained in seat belts.

The second row seat can be folded downand the third row seat can be moved justbehind it in a storage position.

With second row bucket seatsThe normal seating arrangement for sevenpassengers is with the three-passengerbench seat in seating position #1. Thisprovides more leg room for the passengerssitting in the third row.

APD0048 APD0050 APD0128


Z X

When one passenger in the three-passenger bench seat would like more legroom, one of the second row bucket seatscan be removed.

ARS1195


Z X

When more cargo area room is necessary,the three-passenger sliding bench seat canbe moved to seating position #2 or #3. Thisseating arrangement provides less leg roomfor third row passengers, but more cargoroom.

If passengers in the three-passenger benchseat would like more leg room, both secondrow bucket seats can be removed. Passen-gers should not be allowed to ride inareas meant for cargo. Passengersshould always be properly restrained byseat belts.

ARS1205 APD0053


Z X

FLOOR MAT POSITIONS

Seven passenger seatingRemovable floor mats

Whenever you remove the mats for any reason, the mats must bereinstalled before passengers ride in your vehicle. The floor matsare specifically designed to keep objects out of the seat tracks. Thecargo mat is reversible.

Three-passenger bench seat in storage positionCAUTION

It is important to replace the floor mats whenever they areremoved for any reason. The floor mats are intended to helpprevent the possibility that high heeled shoes or similarobjects might become stuck in the seat tracks. Failure toreplace the floor mats might result in personal injury.

Be sure to keep the seat tracks clear of debris by cleaning themperiodically.

Review the following illustrations so you will know the proper way toplace the floor mats with the various seating arrangements availablein your vehicle.

ARS1216 ARS1217


Z X

Five Passenger Seating

ARS1218 ARS1219


Z X

Five Passenger Seating with cargo roomThe step mats are not used in this seating configuration.

Three-passenger bench seat in fully forward positionThe step mats are not used in this seating configuration.

ARS1220 ARS1221


Z X

Floor mat positioning aid

Positioning pins are attached to three of thefloor mats. The cargo mat and front mats donot have pins. However, the driver’s frontfloor mat has a grommet which is placed

over the floor mat positioning bracket lo-cated at the base of the driver’s seat.

Push the positioning pins into the seattracks to ensure correct installation, thenstraighten the mats as necessary.

The step mats have holes in addition topins. When the mats are arranged properly,the positioning pins of the two mats oneither side of each step mat should fitthrough the holes in the step mats and intothe seat track.

WARNING● Do not allow passengers to use

seats placed in storage positionsbecause the seat belts will not pro-tect the occupants. Be sure to usethe proper seat belts for each seatlocation. Improper seat belt usagewill increase the risk of severe injuryin an accident.


● Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and is using a seat beltproperly.

● Failure to follow proper seating in-structions in this section could re-sult in serious personal injury in anaccident or during a sudden stop.

APD0083


Z X

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLE-MENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This supplemental restraint system descrip-tion contains important information concern-ing the driver and passenger supplementalfront air bags. The supplemental restraintsystem air bags can help reduce impactforce to the driver and front passenger incertain frontal collisions. The supplementalair bags are designed to supplement thecrash protection provided by the seat beltsand are not a substitute for the seat belts.The seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the driver and front passengerseated a suitable distance from the steeringwheel and instrument panel. See ‘‘Seatbelts’’ and “Precautions on seat belt usage”later in this section for details.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates. The supplementalair bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is opera-tional.

WARNING● The supplemental front air bag ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, roll over, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bag are most effective whenyou are sitting back and upright in theseat. Front air bags inflate with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaning-forward, sitting sideways, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far away aspractical from the steering wheel orinstrument panel. Always use the seatbelts.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

ARS1132

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


Z X

ARS1133 ARS1041

ARS1042


Z X

WARNING● Never let children ride unrestrained.

Do not attempt to hold them in yourlap or arms. Some examples of dan-gerous riding positions are shown inthe illustrations.

● Children may be severly injured orkilled when the supplemental frontair bag inflates if they are not prop-erly restrained.

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could se-riously injure or kill your child. See‘‘Child restraints’’ later in this sec-tion for details.

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046


Z X

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The frontpassenger supplemental air bag is mounted inthe dashboard above the glove box.

These systems are designed to meet optionalcertification requirements under U.S. regula-tions. They are also permitted in Canada. Theoptional certification allows front air bags tobe designed to inflate somewhat less force-fully than previously. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.

The supplemental front air bag system isdesigned to inflate in higher severity frontalcollisions, although it may inflate if the forcesin another type of collision are similar to thoseof a higher severity frontal impact. It may notinflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always an indica-tion of proper supplemental air bag systemoperation.

When the supplemental front air bag in-flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by the release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicatea fire. Care should be taken to not intention-

ally inhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breathingcondition should get fresh air promptly.

The supplemental front air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the face and chest of theoccupant. They can help save lives andreduce serious injuries. However, an inflat-ing front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.

Seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as faraway as practical from the steering wheel orinstrument panel. The supplemental front airbag inflates quickly in order to help protectthe front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can in-crease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the air bag moduleduring inflation.The air bag deflates quicklyafter a collision.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warn-

WRS0075


Z X

ing light illuminates. The supplementalair bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is opera-tional.

WARNING● Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. Also, do not place anyobjects between any occupant andthe steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause in-jury if the supplemental front air baginflates.

● Right after inflation, several air bagsystem components will be hot. Donot touch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the supplemental front air bagsystem. This is to prevent accidentalinflation of the air bag or damage tothe air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or front endstructure. This could affect properoperation of the supplemental frontair bag system.

● Tampering with the supplementalfront air bag system may result inserious personal injury. Tamperingincludes changes to the steeringwheel and the instrument panel as-sembly by placing material over thesteering wheel pad and above theinstrument panel or by installing ad-ditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Work around and on the supplemen-tal front air bag system should bedone by an authorized NISSANdealer. Installation of electricalequipment should also be done byan authorized NISSAN dealer. TheSupplemental Restraint System(SRS) wiring should not be modifiedor disconnected. Unauthorized elec-trical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on theair bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualifiedrepair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect inflation of the supple-mental air bag system.


Z X

● The SRS wiring harness connectorsare yellow for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the supplemen-tal air bag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this owner’s manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Forfront seats)

WARNING● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot

be reused after activation. It must bereplaced together with the retractoras a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure tohave the pre-tensioner systemchecked and, if necessary, replacedby your NISSAN dealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem. This is to prevent accidental

activation of the pre-tensioner seatbelt or damage to the pre-tensionerseat belt operation. Tampering withthe pre-tensioner seat belt systemmay result in serious personal in-jury.

● Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done byan authorized NISSAN dealer. Instal-lation of electrical equipment shouldalso be done by an authorizedNISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on thepre-tensioner seat belt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con-tact an authorized NISSAN dealer.Correct pre-tensioner disposal pro-cedures are set forth in the appropri-ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incor-rect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem activates in conjunction with the supple-mental front air bag. Working with the seatbelt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

the instant the vehicle becomes involved incertain types of collisions, thereby restrain-ing seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seatbelt’s retractor. These seat belts are usedthe same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may beheard. The smoke is not harmful and doesnot indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot intentionally inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the air bag warning light

will flash intermittently after the igni-tion key is turned to the ON or STARTposition. In this case, the pre-tensioner seatbelt will not function properly.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisowner’s manual.


Z X

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental airbag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits of the supplemental airbag and pretensioner systems. The circuitsmonitored by the air bag warning light in-clude the diagnosis sensor unit, supplemen-tal air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates for about 7 seconds and

ARS1123 WRS0090


Z X

then turns off. This means the system isoperational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental air bag and pre-tensionerseat belt systems need servicing andshould be taken to your nearest authorizedNISSAN dealer.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplementalair bag and/or pre-tensioner seat belts maynot operate properly. It must be checkedand repaired. Take your vehicle to the near-est authorized NISSAN dealer.

WARNINGIf the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that thesupplemental front air bag system willnot operate in an accident.

Repair and replacement procedureThe supplemental front air bag modules aredesigned to inflate on a one-time-only basis.As a reminder, unless it is damaged, thesupplemental air bag light remains illumi-nated after inflation has occurred. Repairand replacement of the air bag systemshould be done only by an authorized NIS-SAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the supplemental front air bag sys-tem and related parts should be pointed outto the person conducting the maintenance.The ignition key should always be in theLOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING● Once the supplemental front air bag

inflates, the air bag module will notfunction again and should be re-placed by an authorized NISSANdealer. The air bag module cannot berepaired.

● The supplemental front air bag sys-tem should be inspected by an au-thorized NISSAN dealer if there isany damage to the front end portionof the vehicle or replaced if thesupplemental air bag has inflated.

● If you need to dispose of a supple-mental air bag or scrap the vehicle,contact an authorized NISSAN dealer.Correct supplemental air bag dis-posal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.


Z X

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in anaccident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced if you are wearing your seatbelt and it is properly adjusted. NISSANstrongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time youdrive, even if your seating position includesa supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. States and Canadian prov-inces or territories require that seat beltsbe worn at all times when a vehicle isbeing driven. WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be prop-erly restrained and, if appropriate, ina child restraint.

● The belt should be adjusted to a snugfit. Failure to do so may reduce theeffectiveness of the entire restraintsystem and increase the chance orseverity of injury in an accident. Seri-ous injury or death can occur if theseat belt is not worn properly.

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible AROUND THE HIPS,NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn toohigh could increase the risk of inter-nal injuries in an accident.

ARS1134

SEAT BELTS


Z X

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-curely fastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one personto use the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the ve-hicle than there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed andall seat belts fastened, it may indi-cate a malfunction in the system.Have the system checked by an au-thorized NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, includingretractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any colli-sion by an authorized NISSAN dealer.NISSAN recommends that all seat

belt assemblies in use during a colli-sion be replaced unless the collisionwas minor and the belts show nodamage and continue to operateproperly. Seat belt assemblies not inuse during a collision should also beinspected and replaced if either dam-age or improper operation is noted.

ARS1047 ARS1050 ARS1049


Z X

● All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected afterany collision. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer’s inspection in-structions and replacement recom-mendations. The child restraintsshould be replaced if they are dam-aged.

CHILD SAFETYChildren need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

The proper restraint depends on thechild’s size. Generally, infants up toabout 1 year and less than 20 pounds (9kg) should be placed in rear facing childrestraints. Forward facing child re-straints are available for children whooutgrow rear facing child restraints.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle’s seat belts maynot fit them properly. The shoulder beltmay come too close to the face or neck.The lap belt may not fit over their smallhip bones. In an accident, an improp-erly fitting seat belt could cause seri-ous or fatal injury. Always use appro-priate child restraints.

All US States and Canadian provinces re-quire the use of approved child restraints forinfants and small children. See ‘‘Child re-straints’’ later in this section.

In addition, there are many types of childrestraints available for larger children whichshould be used for maximum protection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat if possible. According to accidentstatistics, children are safer when prop-erly restrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger (For precautions, see ‘‘Supplementalrestraint system’’ earlier in this section).

Infants and small childrenNISSAN recommends that infants and smallchildren be placed in a child restraint thatcomplies with the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-hicle Safety Standards. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle andalways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use.

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for child re-straints should be seated and restrained bythe seat belts which are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulderbelt that fits close to the face or neck, the useof a booster seat (commercially available)may help overcome this. The booster seatshould raise the child so the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middleportion of the shoulder and the lap belt is lowon the hips. The booster seat should fit thevehicle seat and have a label certifying thatit complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-hicle Safety Standards. Once the child has


Z X

grown enough so the shoulder belt is nolonger on or near the face and neck, use theshoulder belt without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in thecargo areas while the vehicle is mov-ing. The child could be seriously in-jured or killed in an accident or suddenstop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant womenuse seat belts. The seat belt should be wornsnug, and always position the lap belt aslow as possible around the hips, not thewaist. Place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never runthe lap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specific rec-ommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends injured persons useseat belts, depending on the injury. Checkwith your doctor for specific recommenda-tions.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING● Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt atall times.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

● For most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback in the seat and adjust the seatproperly. See “Precautions on seatbelt usage” earlier in this section.

ARS1159 WRS0029


Z X

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-tor and insert the tongue into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack.

The front seat passenger seat belt and rearthree-point seat belts have a cinchingmechanism for child restraint installation. It isreferred to as the automatic locking mode.

When the automatic locking mode is acti-vated, the seat belt cannot be withdrawnagain until the seat belt tongue is detachedfrom the buckle and fully retracted. Refer to

‘‘Child restraints’’ later in this section formore information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not beactivated. If it is activated, it may causeuncomfortable seat belt tension.

ARS1161 ARS1162


Z X

Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the seat belt, press the buttonon the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyretracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lockseat belt movement:

1) when the seat belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor, and

2) when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check their operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull quicklyforward. The retractor should lock andrestrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck or if you have any questions aboutbelt operation, see an authorized NISSANdealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (forfront seats)The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you (See‘‘Precautions on seat belt usage’’ earlier inthis section.). To adjust, press the releasebutton and move the shoulder belt anchor tothe desired position so the belt passes overthe center of the shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Release the buttonto lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

ARS1054 APD0831


Z X

WARNING● After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move theshoulder belt anchor up and down tomake sure it is securely fixed inposition.

● The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the en-tire restraint system and increasethe chance or severity of injury in anaccident.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR FOR SECONDROW BUCKET SEATS

WARNING● Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt atall times.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will

not be against your body. In an acci-dent you could be thrown into it andreceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide under thelap belt and receive serious internalinjuries.

● For most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback in the seat and adjust the seatbelt properly.

Fastening the seat belt1. Adjust the seat.


The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

ARS1083


Z X



Two buckle seat belt system for thesecond row bench seatThere is a two buckle seat belt system forthe seating position of the second rowbench seat next to the passenger side slid-ing door.

WARNING● It is very important that you follow the

instructions in this section beforeanyone rides in this seating positionof the two-passenger bench seat.

● Failure to do so may result in im-proper positioning of seat belt whichcould lead to increased likelihood orseverity of injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

The two-passenger bench seat in the sec-ond row has a seat belt system made up oftwo buckles and two tongues. There are twobody attaching points (one upper and onelower) that attach each end of the seat beltwebbing.

APD0830

ARS1127


Z X

One of the seat belt tongues has two ‘‘win-dows’’ (or holes) and the other has only one‘‘window’’. The seat belt tongue with onewindow attaches to the auxiliary bucklemounted to the side of the seat. The seatbelt tongue with two windows should be

positioned properly and fastened to thebuckle mounted in the middle of the seat.

When the two buckle seat belt system is notin use, the webbing can be secured with theseat belt clip. The seat belt clip should notbe used with a child seat or during seat beltusage. The seat belt clip opening shouldface the front of the vehicle.

A twisted belt may prevent the retractorfrom working properly. If the two buckle seatbelt system is twisted, disengage the singlewindow tongue from the auxiliary buckle onthe side of the seat, remove the twist andreinstall the tongue into the auxiliary buckleuntil you hear a snap and feel the latchengage.

Both tongues must be attached to theirappropriate buckles whenever someoneis riding in that seating position. If thetongues are released to allow a third rowpassenger to enter or exit, the tonguesmust be reattached.

WRS0051

ARS1126


Z X

When the two-passenger bench seat is re-moved from the vehicle, you must detachthe single window tongue from the auxiliarybuckle.

When the three-passenger bench seat ismoved up to the second row position, thepassenger seated near the passengerside sliding door needs to use the doublewindow tongue and the standard buckleonly. Because the three-passengerbench seat is wider and closer to thepassenger side sliding door, the singlewindow seat belt tongue and the auxiliarybuckle are not necessary.

CAUTION

Third row passengers must be verycareful when exiting because of theauxiliary seat belt. It is important tostep over the seat belt guide and beltwebbing to avoid tripping.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the buttonon the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyretracts.

Checking seat belt operation(Three-point type seat belt withretractor)Seat belt retractors are designed to lockseat belt movement:

1) when the seat belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor, and

2) when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check their operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull quicklyforward. The retractor should lock andrestrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck or if you have any questions aboutseat belt operation, see an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

ARS1125


Z X

THREE-PASSENGER BENCHSEAT IN THE SECOND ROWPOSITION

Fastening the seat beltsWhen the three-passenger bench seat ismoved up to the second row position, thepassenger seated near the passengerside sliding door needs to use the doublewindow tongue and the standard buckleonly. Because the three-passengerbench seat is wider and closer to thepassenger side sliding door, the singlewindow seat belt tongue and the auxiliarybuckle are not necessary.

1. Adjust the seat.


3. Position the passenger side shoulder beltin the shoulder belt retainer.

WRS0015 WRS0052


Z X



THREE-PASSENGER BENCHSEAT

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat.

WARNING● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when


● For most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback in the seat and adjust the seatbelt properly.

Third row passenger shoulder belts arelocated slightly behind the third rowseating position. Never try to use theseat belts for the second row passen-gers which are in front of the three-passenger bench seat.

WRS0053 WRS0015


Z X

WARNINGUse of the second row three-point seatbelts by third row passengers couldincrease the chance or severity of in-jury in a sudden stop or an accident.


The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the belt to move,and allows you some freedom of move-ment in the seat. 3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips as shown.


TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITHOUT RETRACTOR (Centerof rear seat)

Selecting correct set of seat beltsThe seat belt tongues must be fastened intothe seat belt buckles as illustrated above.

WARNINGAny rear seat belt tongue will connectto any seat belt buckle; therefore, it isimportant to follow the illustrationabove. Failure to do so could increase

ARS1084 APD0162


Z X

the chance and/or severity of injury inan accident.

Fastening the seat belts1. Insert the tongue into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

2. Tighten the seat belt by pulling the freeend of the belt away from the tongue.

ARS1055 ARS1238


Z X

3. Position the lap belt low and snug onthe hips as shown.

4. Loosen the seat belt by holding thetongue at a right angle to the belt, thenpull on the belt.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on thebuckle.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position,it is not possible to properly fit the front seatlap belts and fasten them, an extender isavailable which is compatible with the in-stalled seat belts. The extender adds ap-proximately 8 inches (200 mm) of lengthand may be used for either the driver or frontpassenger seating position. See an autho-

ARS1076 ARS1057 ARS1058


Z X

rized NISSAN dealer for assistance if theextender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,made by the same company whichmade the original equipment belts,should be used with NISSAN seatbelts.

● Persons who can use the standardseat belt should not use an extender.Such unnecessary use could resultin serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbings, applya mild soap solution or any solution rec-ommended for cleaning upholstery orcarpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allowthe seat belts to dry in the shade. Do notallow the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul-der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors work properly. If looseparts, deterioration, cuts or other dam-age on the webbing is found, the entireseat belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-STRAINTS

WARNING● Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint system while riding in thevehicle. Failure to use a child restraintcan result in serious injury or death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resistthe forces of a severe accident. Thechild could be crushed between theadult and parts of the vehicle. Also, donot put the same seat belt around bothyour child and yourself.

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflating airbag could seriously injure or kill yourchild. A rear-facing child restraintmust only be used in the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the childrestraint be installed in the rear seat.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than in afront seat.

CHILD RESTRAINTS


Z X

● An improperly installed child re-straint could lead to serious injury inan accident.

In general, child restraint systems are de-signed to be installed with a lap belt or thelap portion of a three-point type seat belt. Inaddition, this vehicle is equipped with auniversal child restraint lower anchor sys-tem, referred to as the LATCH (Lower An-chors and Tether for Children) system.Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to these lower anchors. For de-tails, see ‘‘LATCH (Lower Anchors andTether for Children) system’’ later in thissection.

Child restraints for infants and children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manu-facturers. When selecting any child re-straint, keep the following points in mind:

1) Choose only a restraint with a label cer-tifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

2) Check the child restraint in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system. Choosea child restraint that meets the guidelinesof the Society of Automotive Engineersrecommended practice J1819 for childseat installation.

3) If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Always followall recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and some provinces orterritories of Canada require that infantsand small children be restrained in ap-proved child restraints at all times whilethe vehicle is being operated.

WARNING● Improper use of a child restraint can

result in increased injuries for boththe infant or child and other occu-pants in the vehicle.

● Follow all of the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use. When purchasinga child restraint, be sure to selectone which will fit your child andvehicle. It may not be possible toproperly install some types of childrestraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a suddenstop greatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be po-sitioned to fit the child restraint, butas upright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint,test it before you place the child in it.Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check to see if the beltholds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten thebelt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test itagain.


Z X

● For a front facing child restraint, ifthe seat position where it is installedhas a three-point type lap/shoulderbelt, check to make sure the shoul-der belt does not go in front of thechild’s face or neck. If it does, putthe shoulder belt behind the childrestraint. If you must install a frontfacing child restraint in the frontseat, see ‘‘Installation on front pas-senger seat’’ later in this section.

● When your child restraint is not inuse, keep it secured with a seat beltto prevent it from being thrownaround in case of a sudden stop oraccident.

CAUTIONRemember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

INSTALLATION ON THREE-PASSENGER BENCH SEATCENTER POSITION

Front facingWhen you install a child restraint in a rearcenter seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat asillustrated. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

WRS0054 ARS1169


Z X

3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a verytight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap beltadjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure it is securely in place.

5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the seatbelt again, or put the restraint in anotherseat.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint in a rearcenter seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat asillustrated. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

ARS1170 ARS1171 ARS1172


Z X



3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a verytight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap beltadjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure it is securely in place.

5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the seatbelt again, or put the restraint in anotherseat.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

ARS1173 ARS1174 ARS1175


Z X

INSTALLATION ON SECONDAND THIRD ROW OUTBOARDPOSITIONS

Front facingThe following instructions apply to secondrow bucket seats, the second row benchseat and the outboard positions of the three-passenger bench seat.

WARNINGWhen installing a child restraint in thetwo-passenger bench seat, if it isplaced in the seating position next tothe passenger side sliding door, besure both the auxiliary buckle and mainbuckle are properly fastened. Failure todo so could increase the chance and/orseverity of injury in an accident.

WARNING● The three-point belt in your vehicle

is equipped with locking mode re-tractor which must be used wheninstalling a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to thechild in a sudden stop or collision.

When you install a child restraint in a sec-ond row bucket seat, the second row benchseat or the outboard positions of the three-passenger bench seat follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

WRS0055


Z X



3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, theseat belt retractor is in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode). Itreverts back to emergency locking modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.

ARS1177 ARS1178 ARS1179


Z X

5. Before placing the child in the child re-straint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure it is securely held in place.

6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pull moreseat belt out of the retractor. If you can-not pull any more belt webbing out of theretractor, the seat belt is in the automaticlocking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps threethrough six.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted (for the passengerside of the two-passenger bench seat, theauxilliary buckle must also be released), theautomatic locking mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

Rear facingThe following instructions apply to secondrow bucket seats, the second row benchseat and the outboard positions of the three-passenger bench seat.

WARNINGWhen installing a child restraint in thetwo-passenger bench seat, if it isplaced in the seating position next tothe passenger side sliding door, besure both the auxiliary buckle and mainbuckle are properly fastened. Failure todo so could increase the chance and/orseverity of injury in an accident.

WARNING● The three-point belt in your vehicle

is equipped with a locking mode re-tractor which must be used wheninstalling a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The seatcould tip over or otherwise be unse-cured and cause injury to the child ina sudden stop or collision.

ARS1180


Z X

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.




ARS1181 ARS1182 ARS1183


Z X

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.


6. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pull moreseat belt out of the retractor. If you can-not pull any more belt webbing out of theretractor, the seat belt is in the automaticlocking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps threethrough six.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted (for the passengerside of the two-passenger bench seat, theauxilliary buckle must also be released), theautomatic locking mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

ARS1184 ARS1185


Z X

INSTALLATION ON FRONTPASSENGER SEAT

WARNING● Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental front air bags inflatewith great force. A rear-facing childrestraint could be struck by the airbag in a crash and could seriouslyinjure or kill your child.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you install a forward-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passengerseat to the rear most position.

● A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

● The three-point belt in your vehicleis equipped with a locking mode re-tractor which must be used wheninstalling a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to thechild in a sudden stop or collision.

ARS1135


Z X

If you must install a child restraint in the frontseat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the frontpassenger seat. It should be placed ina forward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Alwaysfollow the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Child restraints for infantsmust be used in the rear-facing direc-tion and therefore must not be used inthe front seat.




ARS1163 ARS1164 ARS1165


Z X

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe belt to remove any slack in the belt.


6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seatbelt out of the retractor. If you cannot pullany more belt webbing out of the retractor,the seat belt is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thelap belt is not locked, repeat steps threethrough six.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode) is can-celed.

ARS1166 ARS1167


Z X

WARNING!● Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locationsshown. If a child restraint is not se-cured properly, your child could beseriously injured or killed in an acci-dent.

● Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH system anchors. Thechild restraint will not be securedproperly.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. This sys-tem is known as the LATCH (Lower An-chors and Tether for Children) system. Thissystem may also be referred to as theISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. Withthis system, you do not have to use avehicle seat belt to secure the child re-straint. Your vehicle is equipped with spe-cial anchor points that are used with LATCHsystem compatible child restraints. Checkyour child restraint for a label stating that it iscompatible with the LATCH system. Thisinformation may also be in the child restraintowner’s manual. If you have such a childrestraint, refer to the illustration for the rearseating positions equipped with LATCHsystem anchors which can be used to se-cure the child restraint.

LRS0089

WRS0095

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORSAND TETHER FOR CHILDREN)SYSTEM


Z X

The LATCH system anchors are located atthe rear of the seat cushion near the seat-back. A label is attached to the seatback tohelp you locate the LATCH system anchors.

Some child restraints may also require theuse of a top tether strap. See ‘‘Top TetherStrap Child Restraint’’ later in this sectionfor installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

When you install a LATCH system compat-ible child restraint with lower anchor attach-ments in the rear seat, follow these steps:

WARNING!Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH systemanchors, such as seat belt webbing orseat cushion material. The child re-straint will not be secured properly ifthe LATCH system anchors are ob-structed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, insert the child restraintLATCH system anchor attachments intothe anchor points on the rear seat. If thechild restraint is equipped with a toptether, see ‘‘Top Tether Strap Child Re-straint’’ later in this section for installationinstructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint andbefore placing the child in it, use force totilt the child restraint from side to side andtug it forward to make sure that the childrestraint is securely held in place.

3. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse.

A child restraint anchored with a top tetherstrap can be installed on the second rowbench seat, a second row bucket seat, orthe three-passenger bench seat in the sec-ond or third row. The chart indicates wherethe tether strap must be attached and thesection of this manual that contains theinstructions for tethering.

CHILD RESTRAINT WITH TOPTETHER STRAP


Z X

Seat type Position Tether to Reference

Bucket seat Second row; center ofseat

Anchor bracket onback of bucket seat

Page 1-69, Installationon second row benchor bucket seat

Two passenger benchseat

Second row; outboardseating positions

Anchor bracket onback of second rowbench seat


Two-passenger benchseat with integratedchild safety seat

Second row; driverside seating position

Anchor bracket onback of second rowbench seat


Two-passenger benchseat with integratedchild safety seat

Second row; passen-ger side seating posi-tion

CANNOT BE

TETHERED —

Three-passengerbench seat

Second row;passenger/driver sideoutboard seating posi-tion or center seatingposition

Anchor bracket onback of the three pas-senger bench seat

Page 1-72, Installationon three-passengerbench seat in secondrow

Three-passengerbench seat

Third row;passenger/driver sideoutboard or centerseating position

Anchor bracket onback of the three pas-senger bench seat.

Page 1-72, Installationon three-passengerbench seat in thirdrow

INSTALLATION ON SECONDROW BENCH OR BUCKET SEATA child restraint with a top tether strap maybe placed on the second row bench orbucket seats. Once the child restraint isproperly secured to the seat (see “Installa-tion on second and third row outboard posi-tions, Front facing” earlier in this section),follow the directions to attach the tetherstrap to the tether strap anchor bracket.


Z X

To attach a tether strap to a second rowbench or bucket seat:

1. Route the tether strap under the headrestraint and between the head restraintsupports.

● The head restraint on the second rowbucket seat with the integrated child seatis not adjustable, but there is an openingunder the head restraint to route thetether strap through. Gently lift the headrestraint and route the tether strap underthe center of the head restraint through tothe back side of the seat.

2. Hook the tether strap into the slot in theanchor bracket on the second row seat(located on the lower back of the seat, inline with the head restraint).

APD0839 ARS1194


Z X

3. Tighten the tether strap to remove anyslack.


5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If notsecure, repeat steps two through four.

ARS1193 ARS1199 ARS1192


Z X

INSTALLATION ON THREE-PASSENGER BENCH SEAT INSECOND ROWA child restraint with a top tether strap maybe placed at the passenger side outboardand center positions on the three-passengerbench seat when the seat is in the secondrow location. Once the child restraint is prop-erly secured to the seat (see “Installation onsecond and third row outboard positions,Front facing” earlier in this section), followthe directions explained in ‘‘Installation onthree passenger bench seat in third row’’later in this section.

INSTALLATION ON THREE-PASSENGER BENCH SEAT INTHIRD ROWA child restraint with a top tether strap maybe placed at the passenger/driver side out-board and center positions on the three-passenger bench seat when the seat is inthe third row location. Once the child re-straint is properly secured to the seat (see“Installation on second and third row out-board positions, Front facing” or “Installationon three-passenger bench seat center posi-tion, Front facing” earlier in this section),

follow the directions to attach the tetherstrap anchor brackets.

To attach a tether strap to a third row benchseat:

1. For the passenger/driver side outboardseating positions, route the tether strapunder the head restraint and between thehead restraint supports.

For the center seating position, route thetether strap over the seatback.

WRS0022


Z X

2. Hook the tether strap into the slot in theanchor bracket that is located on thelower back of the seat.

3. Tighten the tether strap to remove anyslack.


5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If it isnot secure, repeat steps two throughfour.

INTEGRATED CHILD SAFETYSEATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Failure to follow the instructions forthe use of these integrated childsafety seats can result in your childstriking the vehicle’s interior duringa sudden stop or crash, causing theinjury or death of your child.

● Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injuryfor both the child and other occu-pants of the vehicle.

All U.S. states and Canadian provincesrequire that infants and small children berestrained in approved child restraints atall times while the vehicle is being oper-ated.

The optional second row bench seat con-tains two integrated child safety seats.These seats are designed for use only bychildren who weigh between 22 and 60pounds (10-27 kg) and whose height is 45inches (1145 mm) or less and who arecapable of sitting upright alone.

WRS0092 WRS0024


Z X

In addition, these integrated child safetyseats must only be used by children whomeet the following requirements:

● AGE:At least one year old

● SEATED HEIGHT:Top of child’s shoulders must be belowthe shoulder harness openings of theintegrated child seat.

Children less than one year old should berestrained in an appropriate separate childrestraint. Children whose shoulders areabove the shoulder harness openings ofintegrated child seat should also be re-strained in an appropriate separate childrestraint or in the appropriate vehicle seatbelt system. Refer to ‘‘Child Restraints’’ and‘‘Precautions On Seat Belt Usage’’ in thissection for important child safety information.

Using the Integrated Child SafetySeats

WARNING:● Never use the vehicle seat belts to

restrain a child in an integrated

child safety seat. Use only the shoul-der harness and belt buckle which ispart of the integrated child safetyseat. Never use the integrated child-safety seat as a booster cushionwith the vehicle seat belts.

ARS1215


Z X

● Before placing the child in the inte-grated child safety seat, confirm thatthe bench seatback is securelylocked and the seatback release le-ver is in full down position.

● Always make sure the integratedchild safety seat belts are properlypositioned on your child. The childshould sit straight up and backagainst the bench seat. The shoulderharnesses should be centered overthe shoulders and fastened with thechest clip. The belt buckle should bebetween the legs and latched to theshoulder belt tongue. Snugly adjustthe belts around your child. Failureto properly position the child canincrease the risk or severity of injuryto the child in an accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

Securing the childBefore using the integrated child safetyseats, carefully read the shoulder har-ness, seatback release, and integratedchild safety seat cushion labels.

The following steps apply to both the leftand right integrated child safety seats.

1. Be sure your child meets all of the re-quired age, weight and height require-ments for the safe use of the integratedchild safety seat.

2. Be sure the second row bench seat issecurely latched to the floor of the ve-hicle. Refer to ‘‘Flexible seating’’ in thissection for proper seat installation proce-dures.

3. Be sure the second row bench seatbackis locked by grasping it and trying to rockit back and forth. Also, check that theseatback release lever is in the full downposition.


Z X

4. Pull the cushion release strap and lowerthe integrated child safety seat cushioncompletely.

NOTE: The head restraints on the pas-senger bench seat equipped with theintegrated child safety seats are not ad-justable or removable.

5. If connected, separate the two halves ofthe shoulder harness from the beltbuckle. Also if connected, disconnect thechest clip and lay the shoulder harnesshalves aside.

ARS1201

APD0814


Z X

6. Place the child on the integrated childsafety seat. Place the belt buckle be-tween the child’s legs.

7. Place the left shoulder harness over thechild’s left shoulder. Insert the left shoulderharness tongue into the left side of the beltbuckle. Confirm that the left shoulder har-ness tongue indicator is green. The shoul-der harness tongues only fit into the propersides of the belt buckle.

8. Place the right shoulder harness over thechild’s right shoulder. Insert the right shoul-der harness tongue into the right side of thebelt buckle. Confirm that the right shoulderharness tongue indicator is green. Theshoulder harness tongues only fit into theproper sides of the belt buckle.

APD0815 APD0816 APD0817


Z X

9. Fasten the two halves of the chest clipand confirm that the chest clip indicator isgreen. Adjust the chest clip (slightly lowerthan the child’s shoulders) so it comfort-ably holds the shoulder harness in positi-ton on the child’s shoulders.

WARNING● Shoulder harness tongues and chest

clips are equipped with visual indica-tors to confirm proper and securelatching. For the safety of the childand occupants of the vehicle, all indi-

cators must show green before oper-ating the vehicle.

● If the shoulder harness is unfas-tened or not fastened properly, thechild could be seriously injured.

10. Grasp the right shoulder harness abovethe chest clip and pull until the harnessfully extends and a click is heard. At thistime, the harness retractor is in theautomatic locking mode (child restraintmode). With the child sitting properly(straight up and back) in the integrated

child safety seat, allow the right shoul-der harness to retract over the rightshoulder and securely restrain the child.A clicking sound is heard as the har-ness retracts, indicating that the retrac-tor is in the automatic locking mode. Besure the left shoulder harness is alsoproperly positioned over the child’s leftshoulder.

11. Check that the shoulder harness is inthe automatic locking mode by trying topull the shoulder harness out of theretractor. If you cannot pull any of theshoulder harness webbing out of theretractor, the shoulder harness is in theautomatic locking mode. If the shoulderharness is not locked, repeat step 10. If,after repeated attempts, the integratedchild safety seat shoulder harness can-not be placed in the automatic lockingmode, do not use the integrated childsafety seat and have it inspected by anauthorized NISSAN dealer.

To cancel the automatic locking mode, un-buckle the chest clip and both shoulderharness tongues. Allow the shoulder har-nesses to retract completely. The automaticlocking mode is now canceled and the

WRS0093 APD0819


Z X

shoulder harness retractor is in the emer-gency locking mode.

WARNING

The automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode) must be reactivated eachtime you place a child in the integratedchild safety seats.

In addition to the automatic locking retrac-tors, the integrated child safety seat shoul-der harnesses are equipped with emer-gency locking retractors. The automaticlocking mode is best to use, especially forchildren who need help staying properlypositioned in the seat and its harnesses (forexample, children who are younger andsmaller), because the belts are alwayslocked. In the emergency locking mode, theshoulder belts only lock in a sudden stop oraccident, allowing a child more freedom ofmovement. Use the emergency lockingmode only if you judge your child able toremain properly positioned in the integratedchild safety seat.

Removing the child1. Release the chest clip.

2. Release the left and right shoulder har-

ness tongues from the belt buckle bypressing the red belt buckle button.

3. Move the left and right shoulder har-nesses aside and assist the child fromthe integrated child safety seat.

Storing the Integrated Child SafetySeat

1. Be sure the shoulder harnesses are fullyretracted and resting inside the inte-grated child safety seat recess. It is notnecessary to reconnect the shoulder har-nesses and belt buckle prior to storingthe integrated child safety seat.

2. While holding onto, but not pulling, thecushion release strap, rotate the cushionupward until it fits flush with the secondrow seat back cushion and locks intoposition.

3. Be sure the integrated child safety seat islocked in the stowed position by graspingthe safety seat cushion and attempting tolower it without pulling the cushion re-lease strap. If the integrated child safetyseat is not locked in the stowed position,repeat steps one through three.

Integrated Child Safety Seat main-tenance

● To clean the shoulder harnesses and beltbuckle webbing, apply a mild soap solu-tion or any solution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpets. Thenbrush the webbing, wipe it with a clothand allow it to dry in the shade. Do notallow the shoulder harnesses to retractuntil they are completely dry.

● The integrated child safety seats clothremovable pads may be cleaned withmild soap and water. The cloth remov-able pads are attached to the seats withfastener strips, and may be easily re-moved. The pads are machine washable.Fo best results, machine wash in coldwater in the gentle cycle. Tumble dry onlow heat. Do not use chlorine bleach, anddo not dry clean.

CAUTIONFailure to follow the washing instruc-tions provided on the cloth removablepads may result in premature wear ordamage.


Z X

● Periodically inspect the belt and metalcomponents of the integrated child safetyseats, such as the buckles, tongues,shoulder harness webbings, and latchingindicators. Periodically check the func-tion of the integrated child safety seatshoulder harness retractor functions. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts, frays,malfunctions or other damage to the beltwebbings or metal parts are found, seean authorized NISSAN dealer for repairs.

Inspection after an accident

If your vehicle was involved in an accident,before using the integrated child safetyseats, all related components should beinspected for damage by an authorizedNISSAN dealer. Damage to the integratedchild safety seat or related componentsmust be repaired.


Z X

MEMO


Z X

2 Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges ................................................2-4Speedometer and odometer .............................2-5Tachometer........................................................2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge...................2-6Fuel gauge ........................................................2-6

Message center (if so equipped) ...........................2-7Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders................................................................2-8

Checking bulbs..................................................2-8Warning lights....................................................2-8Indicator lights .................................................2-10Audible reminders............................................2-12

Vehicle security system (if so equipped) .............2-12Windshield wiper and washer switch...................2-15Rear window wiper and washer switches............2-16Rear window defogger switch..............................2-16Headlight and turn signal switch..........................2-16

Headlight control switch ..................................2-16Autolamp switch (if so equipped) ....................2-18Turn signal switch............................................2-19Cornering light .................................................2-19

Hazard warning flasher switch.............................2-19

Horn......................................................................2-20Heated seats (if so equipped)..............................2-20Rear power socket ...............................................2-22Cigarette lighter and ashtray (accessory) ............2-23Storage.................................................................2-24

Map pockets ....................................................2-24Conversation mirror .........................................2-24Cup holders .....................................................2-25Glove box ........................................................2-26Cargo net.........................................................2-27Parcel shelf (if so equipped) ...........................2-28Luggage rack...................................................2-30

Windows...............................................................2-30Power windows................................................2-30Power vent windows (if so equipped) .............2-32Manual vent windows......................................2-32

Sunroof (if so equipped).......................................2-33Interior lights.........................................................2-34

Luggage...........................................................2-34Personal reading light ..........................................2-34Map lights .............................................................2-35Illuminated entry system ......................................2-35

Z X

HomeLinkT universal transceiver(if so equipped) ....................................................2-35

Programming HomeLinkT................................2-36Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers ........................................................2-37Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver .......................................................2-37

Programming trouble diagnosis.......................2-37Clearing the programmed information.............2-38Rolling code programming ..............................2-38If your vehicle is ever stolen ...........................2-39

Z X

WIC0148

2-2 Instruments and controls

Z X

1. Horn

2. Meters/gauges

3. Gear shift selector lever

4. Hazard warning flasher switch

5. Rear window washer switch

6. Rear window wiper switch

7. Rear window defogger switch

8. Security light

9. Center ventilators

10. Passenger supplemental air bag

11. Side ventilator

12. Glove box

13. FM-AM radio with cassette player

14. FM-AM radio with cassette player andCD player

15. Map pocket (if so equipped)

16. Heater/air conditioner controls

17. Storage compartment

18. Cup holders

19. CD changer (if so equipped)

20. Cigarette lighter (accessory)

21. Audio controls

22. Ignition switch/steering lock

23. Driver supplemental air bag

24. Tilt steering lock lever

25. Parking brake

26. Hood release lever

27. Fuse box cover

28. Cruise control main and set switch

29. Front fog light switch

30. Windshield wiper/turn signal/high beamswitch

31. Headlight control switch

32. Instrument brightness control

Instruments and controls 2-3

Z X

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Reset button for trip odometer

6. Odometer/trip odometer

7. Message center

8. Message center button

WIC0149

METERS AND GAUGES


Z X

SPEEDOMETER ANDODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-played when the ignition key is in the ONposition. The odometer records the totaldistance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distanceof individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset button changes the dis-play as follows:

ODO→TRIP A→TRIP B→ODO.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset button for more than 1second resets the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (RPM).

CAUTIONWhen engine speed approaches thered zone, shift to a higher gear. Oper-ating the engine in the red zone maycause serious engine damage.

WIC0078 WIC0084 WIC0079


Z X

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGEThis gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature. The engine coolant tempera-ture varies with the outside air temperatureand driving conditions.

CAUTIONIf the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature above the normal range,stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-sible. If the engine is overheated, con-tinued operation of the vehicle may

seriously damage the engine. See the‘‘In case of emergency’’ section forimmediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

This gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hills.

The gauge needle remains in approximatelythe same position even when the ignitionkey is turned OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

WIC0080 WIC0081


Z X

Refill the fuel tank before the gaugeregisters E (empty).

CAUTION● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator lamp(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soonas possible. After a few driving trips,the lamp should turn off. If thelamp remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected byan authorized NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the‘‘Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)’’later in this section. The message center only works with the

ignition in the ON position.

The message center displays the followinginformation:

● Outside air temperature

● Average fuel economy

● Distance to empty

You can select the different features bypushing the message center reset button.

Outside air temperaturePress the message center reset button untilthe outside air temperature is displayed.

The outside air temperature sensor islocated in front of the radiator. The sen-sor may be affected by road or engineheat, wind direction and other drivingconditions. The display may differ fromthe actual outside temperature or thetemperature displayed on various signsor billboards.

Average fuel economyPress the message center reset button untilfuel economy is displayed. Fuel economy isdisplayed in liters/100 km or miles/gallon.Your vehicle must be moving to calculatefuel economy. Fuel economy is averagedfrom the last reset. To reset, hold down thereset button momentarily.

Distance to emptyThis will display how many kilometers ormiles you can drive until you run out of fuel.

To ensure accuracy, turn the ignition offwhen you fill the fuel tank.

WIC0083

MESSAGE CENTER (if soequipped)


Z X

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Charge warning lightOverdrive off indicator light(automatic transmission only)

Brake warning light Low fuel warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

High beam indicator light Low washer fluid warning light Anti-lock brake warning light

Seat belt WARNING light and chime CRUISE main switch indicator light Supplemental air bag warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise SET switch indicator light Door open warning light

CHECKING BULBSWith all doors closed, apply the parkingbrake, fasten seat belts, and turn the ignitionkey to the ON position without starting theengine. The following lights come on andstay on until the engine is started:

, , ,

The following lights come on briefly andthen go off:

, ,

If any light fails to come on, it mayindicate a burned-out bulb or an opencircuit in the electrical system. Have thesystem repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stopthe engine immediately and call an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level.See ‘‘Engine oil’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance anddo-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

CAUTIONRunning the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engineas soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING/INDICATORLIGHTS AND AUDIBLEREMINDERS


Z X

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging systemis not functioning properly. Turn the engineoff and check the generator belt. If the belt isloose, broken, missing, or if the light re-mains on, see an authorized NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the belt isloose, broken or missing.

Door open warning lightThis light comes on when any of the doorsare not closed securely while the ignitionkey is ON.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenyour seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt isNOT securely fastened when the ignitionkey is turned to ON or START, the chimesounds for approximately 6 seconds andthe light illuminates.

Refer to ‘‘Seat belts’’ in the ‘‘Seats, re-straints and supplemental air bag systems’’section of this manual for precautions onseat belt usage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the Air Bag Supple-mental Restraint System is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental air bag and pre-tensionerseat belt systems need servicing and yourvehicle should be taken to an authorizedNISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag supple-mental restraint system and/or pre-tensionerseat belts may not function properly. For

additional details, see ‘‘Supplemental re-straint system’’ in the ‘‘Seats, restraints andsupplemental air bag systems’’ section ofthis manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that thesupplemental air bag will not operate inan accident.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer fluid isat a low level. Add washer fluid as neces-sary. See the ‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.

When the ignition key is in the ON position,the light comes on when the parking brakeis applied, and also warns of a low brakefluid level. If the light comes on while theengine is running with the parking brake not


Z X

applied, stop the vehicle and perform thefollowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See ‘‘Brake fluid’’ in the‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ sectionof this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

WARNING● Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light ison. Driving could be dangerous. Ifyou judge it to be safe, drive care-fully to the nearest service stationfor repairs. Otherwise, have your ve-hicle towed because driving it couldbe dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with theengine stopped and/or low brakefluid level may increase your stop-ping distance and braking will re-quire greater pedal effort as well aspedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake-fluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock brake warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the anti-lock portionof the brake system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theanti-lock function turns off, but the brakescontinue to operate normally.

If the light comes on while you are driv-ing, contact an authorized NISSANdealer for repair.

Low fuel warning lightThis light comes on when the fuel level inthe fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before the fuelgauge reaches E (Empty). There will be asmall reserve of fuel in the tank when thefuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on during driving when theoverdrive switch is pressed to prevent over-drive operation (4th gear).

The O/D OFF indicator light comes on fortwo seconds each time the ignition key isturned ON. This shows the light is function-ing properly.

If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks forapproximately 8 seconds after coming on for2 seconds, have an authorized NISSANdealer check the transmission and repair it ifnecessary.

The automatic transmission is equippedwith an electronic Fail-Safe mode. This sys-tem allows the vehicle to be driven even inthe event of damage to the electrical cir-cuits. If this occurs, the transmission maydefault to third gear in drive range.

NOTE: See ‘‘Fail-safe’’ in the ‘‘Starting anddriving’’ section of this manual before visit-ing an authorized NISSAN dealer.


Z X

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turnsignal lever is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch isturned on.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight highbeam is on and goes out when the lowbeam is selected.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise controlmain switch is pushed. The light goes outwhen the main switch is pushed again.While the cruise main switch indicator lightcomes on, the cruise control system isoperational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If thelight blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate the cruise control system is notfunctioning properly. Have the systemchecked by your NISSAN dealer.

Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)

If this indicator lamp comes on steady orblinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential emission control mal-function.

The malfunction indicator lamp may alsocome on steady if the fuel filler cap is looseor missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.Check to make sure the fuel filler cap isinstalled and closed tightly, and that thevehicle has at least three gallons of fuel inthe fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lampshould turn off if no other potential emissioncontrol system malfunction exists.

OperationThe malfunction indicator lamp will come onin one of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator lamp on steady - Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If

the fuel filler cap is loose or missing,tighten or install the cap and continue todrive the vehicle. The lamp shouldturn off after a few driving trips. If the

lamp does not turn off after a fewdriving trips, have the vehicle inspectedby an authorized NISSAN dealer. You donot need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction indicator lamp blinking - Anengine misfire has been detected whichmay damage the emission control sys-tem. To reduce or avoid emission controlsystem damage:

a) do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

b) avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.c) avoid steep uphill grades.d) if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp may stopblinking and come on steady. Have thevehicle inspected by an authorized NISSANdealer. You do not need to have your ve-hicle towed to the dealer.


Z X

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chimeThe chime sounds if the driver’s door isopened while the key is left in the ignitionswitch. Remove the key and take it with youwhen leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chimeA chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened with the headlight control switch on(ignition switch is turned OFF).

The chime will not sound when the Auto-lamp (if so equipped) shut-off delay is acti-vated. Refer to the ‘‘Autolamp Switch’’ in-structions later in this section.

Turn the headlight control switch to OFFwhen you leave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a brake pad requires re-placement, it makes a high pitched scrapingsound when the vehicle is in motion whetheror not the brake pedal is depressed. Havethe brakes checked as soon as possible ifthe warning sound is heard.

The vehicle security system provides audioand visual alarm signals if parts of thevehicle are disturbed.

IC0005

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM(if so equipped)


Z X

Security indicator lightThis light will illuminate for the vehicle secu-rity system.

This light blinks whenever the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK, OFF, or ACC posi-tion. This function indicates the securitysystem equipped on the vehicle is opera-tional.

How to activate the vehicle securitysystem1. Close all windows. (The system can be

activated even if the windows areopen).

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors and the hood.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Alldoors lock. The hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once to indicate alldoors are locked.

● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as areminder that the doors are alreadylocked.

The horn may or may not beep once.Refer to ‘‘silencing the horn beep fea-ture’’ later in this section for details.

5. Confirm that the SECURITY indicatorlight comes on. The SECURITY lightglows for about 30 seconds and thenbegins to flash once every three seconds.The system is now activated. If, duringthis 30-second time period, the door isunlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the

ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not activate.

If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe door, the system may not activate.Furthermore, if the key is turned exces-sively to the unlock position, the systemmay be deactivated when the key is re-moved. If the indicator light fails to glowfor 30 seconds, unlock the door onceand lock it again.

Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will acti-vate with all doors, hood and rear doorclosed with the ignition key in the OFFposition.

Vehicle security system operationThe vehicle security system emits the fol-lowing alarm:

● The headlights and tail lights flash andthe horn sounds intermittently. In addi-tion, the starter motor does not operate.

● The alarm automatically turns off aftertwo to three minutes. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off byunlocking a door with the key or by

LIC0004


Z X

pressing the button on the multi-remote controller.

The alarm is activated when:

● a door is unlocked or opened withoutusing the key or the keyfob. This includesunlocking the doors with the inside doorlock switch.

● the hood is opened.

● the ignition is placed into the ACC, ON,or START position without the key in theignition.

How to stop the alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking a doorwith the key or by pressing the button onthe keyfob.

The alarm does not stop if the ignitionkey is turned to the ACC or ON position.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can bedeactivated using the keyfob. The instruc-tions are on the back of the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the andbuttons for at least two seconds.

The hazard lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the andbuttons for at least two seconds once

more.

The hazard lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beenreactivated.

Deactivating the horn feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by anauthorized NISSAN dealer.

AIC1037


Z X

To operate the wipers intermittently, adjustthe knob between the S (slow) and F (fast)positions. For continuous operation, selectLO or HI.

To operate the washer, press on the end ofthe wiper knob. For more washer fluid, pushand hold the end of the wiper knob. Thewipers cycle a few times when the washer isactivated. The washer operates in any ofthe wiper positions.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thereservoir tank is empty.

WARNINGIn freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which maylead to an accident. Warm the wind-shield with the defroster before youwash the windshield.

AIC0561 AIC0559

WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH


Z X

Push and hold the rear washer switch tooperate the rear washer. The wiper cyclescontinuously until the switch is released.

Push the rear wiper switch to operate thewiper. The wiper cycles intermittently. Pushagain to cancel.

CAUTION● Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.● Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

To defog the rear window glass, start theengine and push the switch on. The indica-tor light on the switch comes on. Push theswitch again to turn the defogger off.The rear window defogger switch is alsoused to defrost, defog, or de-ice the poweroutside heated mirrors (if so equipped).It automatically turns off in approximately 15minutes.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the inner side of thewindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defogger.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the dial to the position:

The front parking, side marker, tail, licenseplate and instrument lights come on.

Turn the dial to the position:

Headlights come on and all of the previouslylisted lights remain on.

To select the high beam, push the turn signallever away from you. The lever latches inplace. Pull it back to select the low beam.

AIC1056 AIC1057 AIC1073

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCHES

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERSWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURNSIGNAL SWITCH


Z X

To turn the interior lights on push the head-light switch. The interior lights come on.Push the headlight switch again to turn theinterior lights off.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operateswhen the light switch is in the or

position, or when the autolamp systemis operating.

Pressing the side of the switch bright-ens the instrument panel lights; pressing the

side of the switch dims the instrumentpanel lights.

Passing signalPulling the lever toward you turns the head-light high beam on. Release it and theheadlight high beam goes off.

Daytime running light system(Canada only)The headlights automatically illuminate at areduced intensity when the engine is startedwith the parking brake released. The day-time running lights operate with the head-light switch in the OFF position or in the

position. Turn the headlight switch tothe position for full illumination whendriving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime running lightsdo not illuminate. The daytime running lightsilluminate once the parking brake is released.The daytime running lights will remain on untilthe ignition switch is turned OFF.

WARNINGWhen the daytime running light systemis active, tail lights on your vehicle willnot be on. It is necessary at dusk toturn on your headlights. Failure to doso could cause an accident injuringyourself and others.

AIC1059


Z X

AUTOLAMP SWITCH(if so equipped)

The autolamp system allows the headlightsto be set so they turn on and off automati-cally. The autolamp system can turn on theheadlights automatically when it is dark,turn off the headlights when it is light, andkeep the headlights on for up to threeminutes after you turn the key to OFF.

To set the autolamp system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in theAUTO1 or AUTO2 position.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolamp system automatically turnsthe headlights on and off.

Shut-off delayThe length of time the headlights stay onafter the ignition is turned to OFF dependson whether the switch is in the AUTO1 orAUTO2 position. If the switch is in theAUTO1 position, then the headlights stay onfor less than 1 minute after the ignition isturned OFF. If the switch is in the AUTO2position, the headlights stay on approxi-mately 3 minutes after the ignition is turnedOFF.

To turn the autolamp system off, turn theswitch to the OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on topof the photo sensor located in the top leftside of the instrument panel. The photosensor controls the autolamp; if it iscovered, the photo sensor reacts as if itis dark out and the headlights will illumi-nate.

AIC1058 AIC1087


Z X

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signalMove the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signal cancels automati-cally.

Lane change signalTo indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to the point where the lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

CORNERING LIGHTThe cornering light provides additional illu-mination toward the turning direction. Thelight on the turning direction side comes onwhen a turn is signaled with the headlightson.

Push the (hazard) switch to warn otherdrivers when you must stop or park underemergency conditions. All turn signal lightsflash. Press the switch again to turn thehazard warning flashers off.

WARNING● If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off theroad.

AIC0560 AIC0102 AIC1060

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH


Z X

● Do not use the hazard warning flash-ers while moving on the highwayunless unusual circumstances forceyou to drive so slowly that your ve-hicle might become a hazard to othertraffic.

● Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers can be actuated with the igni-tion switch either OFF or ON.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving. To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.The front seats are warmed by built-in heat-ers. The switches are located on the seatsand can be operated independently of eachother.

The indicator light in the switch will illumi-nate when turned on.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, orbefore you leave the vehicle, be sure to turnthe switch off.

SIC1280 WRS0088

HORN HEATED SEATS (if soequipped)


Z X

CAUTIONDo not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates heat, such as a blan-ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-wise, the seat may become over-heated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result indamage to the heater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, thinner, or any similar ma-terials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked by your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if theseat heater is operated while theengine is not running.


Z X

The rear power socket is located on thedriver’s side trim panel of the second rowseat behind the side door. Open the coverto gain access to the power socket.

There are two power sockets located on theFamily Entertainment System (FES) (if soequipped).

Use the power socket to plug in electricalequipment such as a cellular telephone, CBradio, etc. Follow the installation instructionsincluded with your electrical equipment.

When not in use, always close the powersocket cover.

CAUTIONWhen using the power socket:● Maximum load of any electrical

equipment should not exceed 10amps.

● Be sure to turn off any electricalequipment when not in use. Leavingelectrical equipment on for extendedperiods can discharge your battery.

WIC0019 LIC0087

REAR POWER SOCKET


Z X

The cigarette lighter element is an acces-sory. A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter orequivalent can be purchased from an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates when theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way. When thelighter is heated, it springs out.

Return the lighter to its original position afteruse.

The utility tray has a rubber mat that may beremoved for cleaning.

The ashtray is an accessory. A genuineNISSAN ashtray or equivalent can be pur-chased from an authorized NISSAN dealer.

The ashtray fits in the utility box. Do notuse the utility box as an ashtray. Useonly a genuine NISSAN ashtray orequivalent.

Pull on the lid of the ashtray to remove it fordisposing of ashes.

CAUTIONThe cigarette lighter socket is a powersource for the cigarette lighter elementonly. The use of the cigarette lightersocket as a power source for any otheraccessory is not recommended.

WARNINGThe cigarette lighter should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.AIC1074 AIC1075

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ANDASHTRAY (accessory)


Z X

MAP POCKETSA map pocket is located on the right handside of the instrument panel and on the backof the passenger seat. The map pocket canbe used to store maps.

CONVERSATION MIRRORSome vehicles are equipped with a conver-sation mirror. Push to open the conversa-tion mirror. Pull down to lock mirror intoplace. Adjust mirror to desired position.Push again to close the conversation mirror.

AIC1078 ARS1249 LIC0020

STORAGE


Z X

CUP HOLDERSTo use the cup holder, pull out. To store thecup holder, push it back in.

The cup holder can be adjusted to fit smallercups by pushing the arms in. The arms havethree detents and then return to the fullyopen position.

Do not pull the cup holder arms or force acup or bottle into the cup holder to adjust toa larger cup position.

WARNINGThe cup holder should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION● Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used toprevent spilling the drink. If the liq-uid is hot, it can scald you or yourpassenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident. Second row cup holder

Vehicles equipped with second row bucketseats have a cup holder attached to the sideof the seat.

AIC1065 WIC0021


Z X

Vehicles equipped with a second row benchseat have a cup holder attached to the frontcenter of the seat.

Pull the cup holder out from the seat to use.

The cup holder can be adjusted to fit smallercups by pushing in the arms. The arms havethree detents and then return to the fullyopen position.

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

CAUTION

Keep glove box lid closed while drivingto help prevent injury in an accident ora sudden stop.

WIC0022 APD0601


Z X

CARGO NETThe cargo net keeps packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicleis in motion.

To install the cargo net, attach the fourloops to the four retainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the fourloops from the cargo net retainers.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

● Be sure to secure all four loops ontothe retainers. The cargo restrainedby the net must not exceed 50 lbs.(22.7 kg) or the net may not staysecured.

APD1067


Z X

PARCEL SHELF (if so equipped)WARNING

● Before using the parcel shelf, thethree-passenger bench seat must be

in the third row position, and theseat back must be upright.

● After adjusting the parcel shelf to thedesired height, make sure the lock

knob is securely latched.

● Properly secure all packages underthe parcel shelf net to prevent themfrom sliding or shifting. Do not placepackages higher than the three-passenger bench seat back. In asudden stop or collision, unsecuredpackages could cause personal in-jury.

● Be sure to secure all three parcelshelf net loops onto the retainerslocated on the bottom side of theparcel shelf. The packages placedon the parcel shelf and restrained bythe parcel shelf net must not exceed30 pounds (13.6 kg), or the parcelshelf may not remain secure.

● Do not allow people or pets on orunder the parcel shelf.

● The parcel shelf must be removedfrom the vehicle if installing a childrestraint on the three-passengerbench seat that requires the use of atop tether strap that is anchored to thevehicle floor. Failure to remove theparcel shelf can increase the severityof injury to the child in an accident.

APD1071


Z X

The parcel shelf allows for additional stor-age for packages.

Do not load more than 30 pounds (13.6 kg)on the parcel shelf. The parcel shelf can beinstalled at two different heights and in astorage position.

To install the parcel shelf:

● Position the right side of the parcel shelfin to one of the shelf positions on the rightside luggage compartment trim panel.

● Position the left side of the parcel shelfinto the matching position (same height)on the left side luggage compartment trimpanel.

● Slide the parcel shelf lock knob fully tothe left side (latch in green dot position).

● Turn the parcel shelf lock knob clock-wise until securely locked.

The parcel shelf is also equipped with aparcel shelf net to keep packages on theparcel shelf from moving around while thevehicle is in motion.

The parcel shelf net is permanently at-tached to the back side of the parcel shelf.

Pull the parcel shelf net over the packages

and attach the three loops to the threeretainers on the bottom side of the parcelshelf. Make sure the parcel shelf is securelylocked before covering the packages withthe parcel shelf net.

To remove the parcel shelf:

● Unlock the parcel shelf net.

● Remove all packages from the parcelshelf.

● Turn the parcel shelf lock knob counterclockwise until loose (maximum twoturns).

● Slide the parcel shelf lock knob fully tothe right side (unlatch in red dot posi-tion).

● Remove the parcel shelf from the leftside luggage compartment trim panel,then the right side luggage compartmenttrim panel and reposition the parcel shelfwhere desired.

Put the parcel shelf in the floor storageposition when the parcel shelf is not used orrequired.

APD1073


Z X

LUGGAGE RACKAlways distribute the luggage evenly on theluggage rack. Do not load more than 100pounds (45 kg). Be careful that your vehicledoes not exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR front and rear). The GVWRand GAWR are located on the Safety Com-pliance Certification Label (located on thedriver’s door pillar). For more informationregarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to‘‘Technical and Consumer Information’’.

The front and rear cross-bars can be adjustedforward and backward. Place your luggage

between the bars, adjust the bars, and securethe luggage with rope to the bars. Alwayscheck the tightness of the adjusting knobs.There are also adjustable loops on the sidebars for the rope attachment.

CAUTIONUse care when placing or removingitems from the luggage rack. If youcannot comfortably lift the items ontothe luggage rack from the ground, usea ladder or stool.

POWER WINDOWSWARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehiclebefore closing the windows. Use thewindow lock switch to prevent unex-pected use of the power windows.

● Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controlsand become trapped in a window.Unattended children could becomeinvolved in serious accidents.APD1072

WINDOWS


Z X

The main switch (on the driver side) opensor closes the driver’s, and passenger’s win-dows, and (if so equipped) rear vent win-dows.

To open the window, press the switch down.To close the window, lift the switch up.

The power windows operate when the igni-tion key is in the ON position, or for 15minutes after the ignition key is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this 15 minute period,power to the windows is cancelled.

Locking passenger’s windowWhen the power window lock-out button ispushed in, the passenger’s window cannotbe opened or closed. Push the power win-dow lock-out button again to cancel thisfeature.

Automatic operationTo fully open the driver side window, pressdown firmly on the switch and release it; youdo not need to hold the switch down. Thewindow automatically opens all the way.

The automatic feature can be interruptedbefore the window is fully open by brieflylifting up on the switch as the window movesdown.

AIC1079 AIC1080


Z X

The passenger side switch opens or closesthe passenger window only. To open thewindow, press the switch down. To closethe window, lift the switch up.

POWER VENT WINDOWS(if so equipped)

Use the vent window switches on the driv-er’s side window controls to open and closethe power vent windows. To open one of thepower vent windows, press the switch down.To close the window, lift the switch up.

The power vent windows operate when theignition key is in the ON position, or for 15minutes after the ignition key is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this 15 minute period,power to the vent windows is cancelled.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWSTo open the manual vent windows, pull therear portion of the latch toward you until itreleases. To lock the window in the openposition, push the latch rearward until youhear it latch. To close the windows, pull thelatch toward you and push the rear portionof the latch toward the rear of the vehicleuntil you feel it latch.

AIC1081 AIC1067 AIC0111


Z X

The sunroof operates when the ignition keyis in the ON position, or for 15 minutes afterthe ignition key is turned to the OFF posi-tion. If the driver’s or passenger’s door isopened during this 15 minute period, powerto the sunroof is cancelled.

NOTE:If the battery is discharged or is discon-nected, the sunroof may not operate cor-rectly, and must be reset.

To reset a fully or partially open sunroof:

1. Push and hold the UP/CLOSE side of thesunroof switch until the sunroof closes,

and tilts up to the fully open position, thenrelease the switch.

2. Push and hold the DOWN/OPEN side ofthe switch until the sunroof lowers com-pletely. The sunroof is now reset andshould operate correctly.

To reset a fully or partially tilted, or closedsunroof:

1. Push and hold the UP/CLOSE side of thesunroof switch until the sunroof stopstilting up, then release the switch.

2. Push and hold the DOWN/OPEN side ofthe switch until the sunroof lowers com-pletely. The sunroof is now reset andshould operate correctly.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, push and hold the OPENside of the switch.

To close the roof, push and hold the CLOSEside.

Tilting the sunroofTo tilt up, first close the sunroof, then push theUP side of the switch. To close the sunroof,push the DOWN side of the switch.

Sun shadeOpen and close the sun shade by sliding itforward or backward. The shade openswhen the sunroof opens, but it must beclosed manually.

WARNING● In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an opensunroof. Always use seat belts andchild restraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION● Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the sunroof before opening.● Do not place any heavy object on the

sunroof or surrounding area.

AIC1066

SUNROOF (if so equipped)


Z X

The interior lights operate regardless ofignition key position.

One interior light is located overhead nearthe front seats and one is overhead near therear seat.

The interior lights have three-positionswitches:

● When the switch is in the OFF position,the interior light does not illuminate, re-gardless of door position.

● When the switch is in the center O posi-tion, the light illuminates when a door isopened.

● When the switch is in the ON position,the interior light illuminates, whether anydoor is open or closed.

CAUTIONDo not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This couldresult in a discharged battery.

LUGGAGEWhen the back door is opened, the luggagecompartment light and the rear interior lightilluminate.

When the back door is closed, the lights gooff.

The driver’s side, second and third rowseating positions have a personal readinglight located in the overhead trim panel.

To turn the light on, press once on theright-hand side of the light cover.

To turn the light off, press again on theright-hand side of the light cover.

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This couldresult in a discharged battery.

AIC0053 AIC1088

INTERIOR LIGHTS PERSONAL READING LIGHT


Z X

To turn on the map lights, press theswitches. To turn them off, press theswitches again.

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This couldresult in a discharged battery.

The interior lights, the cargo light, the glovebox light, the stepwell lights near the slidingdoors and on the front doors, and the foot-well lights near the driver’s and front pas-senger’s feet illuminate when the front orsliding doors are opened. Once the doorsare closed, these lights gradually dim to offwithin 30 seconds or turn off immediatelywhen the key is turned to the ON position.

Battery saverIf the vehicle doors are not fully closed andthe interior lights remain illuminated, theyeventually turn off automatically to preventthe battery from becoming discharged. If theinterior lights are left in the ON position, withall doors closed, they will automatically turnoff after approximately 30 minutes. Lightsthat illuminate when the front or slidingdoors are opened turn off after approxi-mately 30 minutes. Lights that illuminatewhen the back door is opened turn off afterapproximately 60 minutes. Vanity mirrorlights are not part of the battery saversystem.

If the personal reading lights are left on afterthe key is removed from the ignition, theywill automatically turn off after approxi-mately 30 minutes.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-heldtransmitters into one built-in device.

● The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverwill operate garage doors, gates, home/office lighting systems and security sys-tems by storing and transmitting the pro-gramming information of your currenthand-held transmitters.

● The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver isbuilt-in and powered by your vehicle’sbattery and charging system. No separatebatteries are necessary.

WARNINGDo not use this HomeLink T UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards (these standards be-came effective for models manufac-tured after April 1, 1982). A garage dooropener which cannot detect an objectin the path of a closing garage door andthen automatically stop and reverse the

AIC1097

MAP LIGHTS ILLUMINATED ENTRYSYSTEM

HomeLinkT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if soequipped)


Z X

door, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

PROGRAMMING HomeLinkTWARNING

During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming your transmit-ter. The HomeLink T Universal Trans-ceiver may not work with older garagedoor openers that do not meet currentFederal Consumer Safety Standards.

1. Test the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver by pressing any button. The redindicator light should come on. If youhave previously programmed a buttonproceed to step 3.

2. Clear all channels on the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver by holding downboth outside buttons (#1 & #3) until thered light begins to flash rapidly (approxi-mately 20 seconds). Then release bothbuttons.

3. Select which of the three HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver buttons you wantto program.

4. Hold your hand-held transmitter againstthe bottom surface of the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver so that you canstill see the red indicator light.

AIC1069


Z X

5. Press the desired button until the redindicator light flashes slowly. Do not re-lease the button. Continue holding andpress the hand-held transmitter buttonthrough step 6.

6. Hold down both buttons until the redindicator light on the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver flashes rapidly (This maytake 1 to 90 seconds). Then release bothbuttons. The rapid flashing means thatthe transceiver has been successfullyprogrammed to match your hand-heldtransmitter. You can now use theHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver in-stead of your hand-held transmitter.

PROGRAMMING HomelinkT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredmany hand-held transmitters to stop trans-mitting after one or two seconds, eventhough you continue to hold down the but-ton. If you think you have one of thesehand-held transmitters, you should pressand re-press the transmitter button every 2seconds without ever releasing theHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button.The indicator light on the HomeLinkT Uni-versal Transceiver should blink rapidly indi-

cating a successful programming proce-dure. If it returns to the slow blink of programmode, continue to periodically reactivateyour hand-held transmitter until a success-ful programming procedure is indicated bythe rapidly flashing indicator light.

OPERATING THE HomeLinkTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERTo operate, simply press the appropriatebutton on the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver. The red indicator light illuminateswhile the signal is being transmitted. Theeffective transmission range of theHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver may dif-fer from your hand-held transmitter.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSISBe sure to keep your original hand-heldtransmitter for possible reprogramming ifnecessary.

● Make sure batteries in the hand-heldtransmitter are fully charged.

● Hold your hand-held transmitter againstthe bottom surface of the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver so that you canstill see the red indicator light.

● Hold buttons for duration of the program-ming without interruption.

● Rotate your hand-held transmitter end-over-end and program again. For bestresults, place the end opposite the bat-tery compartment against theHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver whenprogramming.


Z X

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Should you sell your vehicle, be sure toclear the channels of the HomeLinkT Uni-versal Transceiver. To clear the channels,simultaneously hold down the outside twobuttons (#1 & #3) until the red indicator lightbegins to flash rapidly (approximately 20seconds). This will clear all three buttons.Individual buttons cannot be cleared, butcan be reprogrammed at any time by follow-ing the programming procedures describedpreviously.

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

If your hand held transmitter appears totrain to the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver, but does not open your garage door,and your garage door opener was manufac-tured after 1995, your garage door openermay have a Code Protected or Rolling Codefeature. This type of system will change thecode of your garage door opener every timeyou open or close your garage door.

To determine if you have one of thesesystems, depress the button on theHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver that youhave just programmed. If the LED on theHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver flashesrapidly for 1 to 2 seconds, then remains on,your garage door opener has a rolling codesystem.

To operate your rolling code garage dooropener from your HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver, follow these steps:

1. Program your hand held transmitter tothe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver byfollowing the procedures outlined previ-ously (if not yet programmed).

2. Program your garage door opener re-ceiver to recognize the HomeLinkT Uni-

versal Transceiver (The HomeLinkT Uni-versal Transceiver follows the sameprocedure to train to the receiver as yourhand held transmitter did when it was firstinstalled):

a) Remove the cover panel from yourgarage door opener receiver. The re-ceiver should be located by the ga-rage door opener motor.

b) Locate the training button on the ga-rage door opener receiver. The exactlocation and color of the button mayvary by garage door opener brand. Ifyou have difficulty locating the trainingbutton, reference your garage dooropener manual. If you have difficultyprogramming your garage dooropener equipped with a rolling codesystem to recognize the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver with the RollingCode feature, call NISSAN ConsumerAffairs Department.

c) Press the training button on the ga-rage door opener receiver for 1 to 2seconds.

AIC1070


Z X

d) Return to the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver in the vehicle, and de-press the programmed HomeLinkTbutton for the duration of the fast blinkon the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver (1 to 2 seconds). Release thebutton, and repress to confirm that thesystem has trained.

e) Your garage door opener should nowrecognize your HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver. You may use either yourHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver oryour original hand held transmitter toopen your garage door.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS EVERSTOLENIf your vehicle has been stolen, you shouldchange the codes of any device that wasprogrammed into the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver as soon as possible. Consultthe owners manual of each device, or callthe manufacturer or dealer of those devices.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willhave to reprogram the HomeLink T Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.

FFC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) Thisdevice must accept any interference thatmay be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested andcomplies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690


Z X

MEMO


Z X

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .......................................................................3-2Doors......................................................................3-2

Locking with key................................................3-3Locking with inside lock knob............................3-3Locking with power door lock switch.................3-4Child safety sliding door locks...........................3-5

Remote keyless entry system................................3-6How to use remote keyless entrysystem ...............................................................3-6Battery replacement ..........................................3-8

Hood.......................................................................3-9Rear door .............................................................3-10

Fuel filler lid ..........................................................3-10Opener operation ............................................3-10Fuel filler cap...................................................3-10

Steering wheel .....................................................3-11Tilt operation....................................................3-11

Sun visors.............................................................3-12Vanity mirror ....................................................3-12

Mirrors ..................................................................3-12Memory driver seat and mirrors(if so equipped)................................................3-12Inside mirror.....................................................3-13Outside mirrors ................................................3-14

Z X

A key number plate is supplied with yourkey. Record the key number and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), NOT INTHE CAR. NISSAN does not record keynumbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.A key number is necessary only when youhave lost all vehicle keys and do not haveone to duplicate. If you still have a key, thiskey can be duplicated by an authorizedNISSAN dealer or locksmith shop.

Two keys are supplied with your vehicle —one has a plastic head and one is all metal.Both keys perform the same functions.

WARNING● Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from unintention-ally opening the doors, and will helpkeep out intruders.

● Before opening any door, alwayslook for and avoid oncoming traffic.


CAUTION● Always use the door handle to open

or close a sliding door. Do not at-tempt to open or close the doors bymerely placing your hand on thedoor edge or door slide roller, as thismay cause injury.

WPD0088

KEYS DOORS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z X

● Always be sure that hands and feetare clear of the door frame to avoidinjury while closing a sliding door.

● When opening a sliding door on aslope, ensure that it is fully open andthat it does not close by itself.

LOCKING WITH KEYTurning the door key one time to the rear ofthe vehicle unlocks the corresponding door.From that position, returning the key toNeutral (where the key can only be removedand inserted) and turning it to the rear againwithin 5 seconds unlocks all doors. Turningthe door key to the front of the vehicle locksall doors. The selective unlock function andlocking all doors can be operated from thedriver, passenger and rear door.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock all doors from inside the vehicle,push the door lock knob in, then close thedoor. When locking the doors this way, becertain not to leave the key inside the ve-hicle. All doors automatically unlock if thekey is in the ignition and a door is open.

APD1057WPD0087

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Z X

Sliding doorTo lock a sliding door from inside the ve-hicle, press the door lock rocker switch onthe side marked L. To unlock, press therocker switch on the side marked U.

The driver side sliding door cannot befully opened when the fuel door is open.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHOperating the lock-unlock switch locks orunlocks all doors.

If the power door lock switch is pressedwhen a sliding door is open, the sliding doorautomatically locks when it is closed.

APD1055 APD1074


Z X

CHILD SAFETY SLIDING DOORLOCKS

Child safety locking helps prevent doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especiallywhen small children are in the vehicle.

When the lever is in the LOCK position,the sliding doors can be opened onlyfrom the outside.

APD1075

APD1056


Z X

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turnthe interior lights on or off, and activate thepanic alarm by using the keyfob from out-side the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from thevehicle before locking the doors andleaving it.

The keyfob can operate at a distance ofapproximately 30 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.The effective distance depends on the con-ditions around the vehicle.

As many as four keyfobs can be used withone vehicle. For more information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional key-fobs, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer.

CAUTIONListed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:● Do not allow the keyfob to become

wet.● Do not drop the keyfob.● Do not strike the keyfob sharply

against another object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an ex-tended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEY-LESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all doors.

2. Push the button on the keyfob.

3. All doors lock.

4. The parking lights flash twice and thehorn chirps once to verify all doors arelocked.

Unlocking doorsFor memory seat and mirror informationsee ‘‘Memory driver seat and mirrors’’ laterin this section.

1. Push the button on the keyfob. Onlythe driver door unlocks. Parking lightsflash once.

2. The interior lights come on and stay onfor 30 seconds.

3. Push the button on the keyfob again

within five seconds. The passenger door,sliding doors, and the rear door unlock.

The interior lights can be turned off withoutwaiting 30 seconds by either turning theignition to ON or locking the doors with themulti-remote controller.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm tocall attention as follows:

1. Push and hold the button on thekeyfob for at least one full second.

2. The theft warning alarm (horn) soundsand the headlights and tail lights flash for30 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 30 seconds, or

● the or the button is pressed, or

● the button is released and re-pushed.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEM


Z X

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can bedeactivated using the keyfob. The instruc-tions are on the back of the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the andbuttons for at least two seconds.

The hazard lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the andbuttons for at least two seconds

once more.

The hazard lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beenreactivated.

Deactivating the horn feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

AIC1037


Z X

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery as follows:1. Open the lid using a coin.2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Insert the batteries as illustrated above.

Recommended battery: PanasonicCR2025, 3V or equivalent.

3. Close the lid securely.4. Press the button, then the button two

or three times to check the keyfob opera-tion.

If the batteries are removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4.● An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always conformto local regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 30 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

APD1087

BATTERY REPLACEMENT


Z X

1. Pull the hood lock release handle s1located below the instrument panel; thehood then springs up slightly.

2. Pull up on the lever s2 at the front of thehood and raise the hood.

3. Insert the support rod s3 into the slot onthe underside of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the supportrod to its original position, lower the hoodto approximately 12 inches above thelatch and release it. This allows properengagement of the hood latch.

WARNING● Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause thehood to fly open and result in anaccident.

● If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

WPD0053

HOOD


Z X

Key operationTo unlock the rear door, turn the key coun-terclockwise. To open the rear door, lift upon the opener handle near the license plate.To close, lower and push the rear doordown securely.

WARNINGDo not drive with the rear door or glassopen. This could allow dangerous ex-haust gases to be drawn into the ve-hicle. See ‘‘Exhaust gas’’ in the ‘‘Start-ing and driving’’ section of this manual.

To lock the rear door with the key, turn thekey clockwise as shown in the illustration.

Turning the key fully clockwise unlocks therear window on models equipped with theflip-up rear window. The rear wiper auto-matically lowers when the key is turned fullyclockwise. Do not force the wiper to lowerby hand.

To close the rear window, firmly push on thewindow until it locks in place. The rear wiperautomatically returns to the original position.

OPENER OPERATIONTo open the fuel filler lid, grasp the righthand edge of the lid and pull.

FUEL FILLER CAPThe fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type.Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchetingclicks are heard. Ensure the plastic tetherdoesn’t get caught between the fuel fillercap and the fuel filler neck.

The driver side sliding door cannot befully opened when the fuel door is open.Make sure the driver side sliding door is

APD1065 WPD0011

REAR DOOR FUEL FILLER LID


Z X

completely closed before opening thefuel door.

WARNING● Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain con-ditions. You could be burned or se-riously injured if it is misused ormishandled. Always stop the engineand do not smoke or allow openflames or sparks near the vehiclewhen refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap one-half turn, and wait for any‘‘hissing’’ sound to stop to preventfuel from spraying out and possiblycausing personal injury. Then re-move the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fueltank after the fuel pump nozzle shutsoff automatically. Continued refuel-ing may cause fuel overflow, result-ing in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An

incorrect cap can result in a seriousmalfunction and possible injury.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoidpaint damage.

● Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel filler capproperly may cause the mal-function indicator lamp (MIL) to illu-minate. If the lamp illuminatesbecause the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the capand continue to drive the vehicle.The lamp should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the lampdoes not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected byan authorized NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the‘‘Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)’’in the ‘‘Instrument and controls’’section earlier in this manual.

TILT OPERATIONPush the lock lever down and adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desiredposition. Pull the lock lever up firmly to lockthe steering wheel in place.

Gently pull down on the wheel to make sureit is properly locked.

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

APD1051

STEERING WHEEL


Z X

VANITY MIRRORAccess the mirror by pulling the sun visordown and lifting the cover up. The vanitymirror will illuminate when the mirror coveris opened.

MEMORY DRIVER SEAT ANDMIRRORS (if so equipped)The memory driver seat and mirror functionprovides a convenient way to recall a driv-er’s seat and outside mirror positions. Un-locking the doors using the multi-remotecontroller, or by pressing the memory seatposition 1 or position 2 button activates thememory driver seat and mirrors.

Remote keyless entry system entryPressing the button on the keyfob un-locks the driver’s door, and recalls thememory settings for both outside mirrors

and driver’s seat for that memory position.Two keyfobs are delivered with the vehicle.They can be programmed with the samememory driver’s seat and mirror positions,or each one can be programmed sepa-rately. One keyfob can be programmed formemory driver’s seat and mirror position 1,and the other for memory driver’s seat andmirror position 2.

Memory Driver Seat and Mirror But-tonsThe memory seat and mirror buttons arelocated on the driver door. Pressing thememory driver seat and mirror position 1 orposition 2 button will recall the memory set-tings for both outside mirrors and driver seatfor that memory seat position, provided thevehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral). For easyvehicle exit, press memory driver seat andmirror position 1 and position 2 buttons to-gether to move the driver seat fully rearwardand fully downward. This function is presetand cannot be changed.

Programming Memory Positions1. Move the driver seat and outside mirrors

to the desired position using the manualcontrols.

WPD0012 APD1062

SUN VISORS MIRRORS


Z X

2. Push and hold the memory seat andmirror position 1 or position 2 button forat least 3 seconds.

● The indicator light will illuminate and re-main illuminated until the position is pro-grammed.

● After the position has been programmedthe indicator light will flash to indicate theposition is set.

The driver seat and/or outside mirrors mustbe adjusted before programming position 1or position 2.

Programming a keyfob1. Move the driver seat and outside mirrors

by pressing the desired position 1 orposition 2 button.

2. Press and hold the same (position 1 orposition 2) button.

3. Within 10 seconds press the button onthe keyfob.

The keyfob is now programmed for that(position 1 or position 2) button.

After the keyfob has been programmed, thememory seat and mirror button indicatorlight will flash to indicate the keyfob is

programmed. If the memory seat button ispressed and held the indicator light willremain illuminated for as long as the buttonis held or 10 seconds which ever is shorter.

To remove a keyfob from the memory seatsystem press and hold both memory seatand mirror position buttons 1 and 2 and thenpress the button on the keyfob.

INSIDE MIRRORThe night position reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

WARNINGUse the night position only when nec-essary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

PD1006M


Z X

OUTSIDE MIRRORSThe outside mirrors operate only when theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the switch to select the right or leftside mirror, then adjust using the controllever.

WARNINGObjects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could

cause an accident. Use the inside mir-ror or glance over your shoulder toproperly judge distances to other ob-jects.

Heated mirrors (Canada only)The electric control type outside mirrors canbe heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice forimproved visibility. Press the rear windowdefogger switch to activate the heating func-tion. Press the switch again to deactivate, orthe heating function will automatically turnoff after approximately 15 minutes.

Foldable outside mirrorsPush the outside mirrors backward to foldthem.

APD1052 M008


Z X

4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Ventilators ..............................................................4-2Center ventilators ..............................................4-2Side ventilators ..................................................4-2

Heater and air conditioner (manual) ......................4-3Controls .............................................................4-3Heater operation................................................4-4Air conditioner operation ...................................4-5Air flow charts....................................................4-7

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) ....................................................4-11

Automatic operation ........................................4-12Rear seat air conditioner (if so equipped) ...........4-14

Controls ...........................................................4-14Servicing air conditioning .....................................4-15Audio system........................................................4-16

Radio ...............................................................4-16FM radio reception ..........................................4-16AM radio reception ..........................................4-16Audio operation precautions ...........................4-17

FM-AM radio with cassette player...................4-20FM-AM radio with cassette player andcompact disc (CD) player................................4-26Compact disc (CD) player (if soequipped).........................................................4-32CD care and cleaning......................................4-33Steering wheel switch for audio controls(if so equipped)................................................4-34Rear audio controls (if so equipped)...............4-35Antenna ...........................................................4-37

AutovisionT family entertainment system(FES) (if so equipped)..........................................4-37

Rear seat entertainment module(RSEM) (if so equipped)..................................4-41Care and maintenance....................................4-43Troubleshooting...............................................4-44Specifications ..................................................4-45

Car phone or CB radio.........................................4-46

Z X

CENTER VENTILATORSOpen, close and adjust the air flow directionof ventilators.

SIDE VENTILATORSOpen, close and adjust the air flow directionof ventilators.

: This symbol indicates a vent is closedwhen the vent switch is moved down.

: This symbol indicates a vent is openwhen the vent switch is moved up.

AHA1056 AHA1055

VENTILATORS

4-2 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Z X

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling functionoperates only when the engine isrunning.

● Do not leave children, impairedadults, or pets alone in your vehicle.On hot, sunny days, temperatures ina closed vehicle could quickly be-come high enough to cause severeor possibly fatal injuries to people oranimals.

● Do not use the recirculation modefor long periods as it may cause theinterior air to become stale and thewindows to fog up.

● Positioning of the heater and air con-ditioner controls should not be donewhile driving, so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

This dial controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

This dial allows you to select the air flowoutlets.

Air flows mainly from center and sideventilators.

Air flows from center and side ventila-tors and the front and rear foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from the front andrear foot outlets.

Air flows from defroster outlets andthe front and rear foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

MAXA/C

Air flows mainly from center and sideventilators.

WHA0008

HEATER AND AIRCONDITIONER (manual)

Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

Z X

OFF position

The OFF position shuts off the air supply toall outlets and stops all fan operations. Usethe OFF position to prevent cold air fromentering the passenger compartment undercold outside conditions before the engine iswarmed up.

MAX A/C Position

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Turn the air control dial to the MAX A/Cposition when driving on a dusty road orto help keep out traffic fumes.

Turn the air control dial to the MAX A/Cposition for improved air conditioner perfor-mance under high temperature and high hu-midity conditions.

CAUTIONDo not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

Temperature control dialThis dial allows you to adjust the tempera-ture of the outlet air.

Air conditioning button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial tothe desired (one to four) position, select anair control position and push the air condi-tioner button to turn on the air conditioner.The indicator light comes on when the airconditioner is operating. To stop the air con-ditioner, push the button again; the indicatorlight goes off.

The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct most of the hotair to the front and rear floor outlets. Rearpassenger heat is provided by the frontsystem through floor outlets located underboth front seats.

1. Move the air control dial to the po-sition.

2. Turn the fan control dial to select speed.

3. Move the temperature control dial to thedesired position.

Ventilation

This mode directs air to the side and centervents.




Defrosting or defogging

This mode is used to defrost/defog thewindows.




When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on(however, the indicator light will not illu-minate) if the outside temperature ismore than 45°F (7°C). This dehumidifiesthe air which helps defog the windshield.The air recirculation mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawn


Z X

into the passenger compartment whichhelps defog the windshield.

Bi-level heating/cooling

The bi-level mode directs air to the side andcenter vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.

Bi-level is also a cooling mode when highsun load conditions are present with cooltemperatures.

With the A/C system in operation, this modecan be used to cool the passenger’s ordriver’s feet under high temperature condi-tions.

With the A/C system in operation under hightemperature conditions, improved coolingcan be obtained by moving the air controldial to the MAX A/C position.


2. Turn the fan control dial to the desiredposition.


Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs thewindshield. This mode directs air to thedefroster and the front and rear floor outlets.Rear passenger heat is provided by thefront system through floor outlets locatedunder both front seats.


2. Turn the fan control dial to the desiredposition.


When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on(however, the indicator light will not illu-minate) if the outside temperature ismore than 45°F (7°C). This dehumidifiesthe air which helps defog the windshield.The air recirculation mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment whichhelps defog the windshield.

Operating tips● Clear snow and ice from the wiper

blades and air inlet in front of the

windshield. This improves heater op-eration.

● To defog the side windows more effec-tively when in bi-level or ventilationmode, close the center vent and directthe side vents toward the side windows.

● A slight delay may be experienced whenchanging air control buttons. The systemis not malfunctioning. It is only the sys-tem motors and solenoids switching fromone outlet to another.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, move the fan control dial tothe desired (one to four) position, and selectan air control position before pushing in theair conditioner button to activate the airconditioner. When the air conditioner is on,cooling and dehumidifying functions areadded to the heater operation.

WARNINGThe air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


Z X

NOTE: When switching air flow outlets, theA/C system remains activated unless theA/C button is pressed to the OFF position.The indicator light on the A/C button re-mains illuminated unless the button ispressed to the OFF position, or the OFF aircontrol position is selected.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify.



3. Push the air conditioner button. The indi-cator light comes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, move the air control dialto the MAX A/C position. Be sure toreturn the air control dial to the po-sition for normal cooling.

● Opening the windows helps to vent heatbuildup when parked in the sun.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify.



3. Push the air conditioner button. The indi-cator light comes on.


Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windowsand dehumidify.


2. Turn the fan control dial to the desiredspeed.


When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on(however, the indicator light will not illu-minate) if the outside temperature ismore than 45°F (7°C). This dehumidifiesthe air which helps defog the windshield.

The air recirculation mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment whichhelps defog the windshield.

Operating tips● Keep windows and sun roof closed while

the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for two orthree minutes with the windows open tovent hot air from the passenger compart-ment. Then, close the windows. Thisallows the air conditioner to cool theinterior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for about ten minutes atleast once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● If the engine coolant temperature gaugeexceeds the H (hot) position, turn the airconditioner off. See ‘‘If your vehicle over-heats’’ in the ‘‘In case of emergency’’section for additional information.


Z X

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button anddial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICKheating, cooling or defrosting.

WHA0009


Z X

WHA0010 WHA0011


Z X

WHA0012 WHA0094


Z X

WHA0014


Z X

WARNING● The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine isrunning.

● Do not leave children, impairedadults, or pets alone in your vehicle.On hot, sunny days, temperatures ina closed vehicle could quickly be-come high enough to cause severeor possibly fatal injuries to people oranimals.

● Do not use the recirculation modefor long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and thewindows to fog up.

● Positioning of the heater and air con-ditioner controls should not be donewhile driving, so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

The Electronic Automatic TemperatureControl (EATC) is located at the center ofthe instrument panel, below the radio. TheEATC operates only when the ignition isturned to the ON position.

The EATC maintains the temperature you

select and controls the airflow for your com-fort. It also allows you to override the auto-matic operation with manual function selec-tor buttons.

To turn the EATC on, push either the AU-TOMATIC button or any of the six functionselector buttons: , , , ,

or MAX. To turn the EATC off, pressthe OFF button.

When you select AUTOMATIC, the systemdetermines fan speed, airflow location anddischarge air temperature. When one of thefunction selector buttons is pressed, yourselection determines airflow location only.Fan speed and discharge air temperatureremain automatic. You can override fanspeed by rotating the vertical thumbwheel

located at the extreme right of thecontrol panel.

The display window indicates the status ofthe system. It shows the selected tempera-ture and AUTO when in the AUTOMATICmode. It also indicates manual (thumb-wheel) control of the fan speed when a

is shown.

WHA0015

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)


Z X

AUTOMATIC OPERATIONPush the AUTOMATIC button and select thedesired temperature. The selected tempera-ture and AUTO show in the display window.The EATC heats or cools to achieve the settemperature.

When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditionsrequire heat, air is sent to the floor. However,a feature is included in the EATC to preventblowing cold air to the floor if the enginecoolant is not warm enough to allow heating.In three or four minutes the fan speed gradu-ally increases and airflow changes to the floor.

If unique conditions exist, such as windowfogging, the five override buttons allow spe-cific airflow selection. The thumbwheel al-lows you to adjust the fan speed to suit yourneeds.

Temperature selectionThe TEMP button on the left side ofthe control panel is for temperature selec-tion. The side lowers the set tempera-ture, and the side raises the set tem-perature. Press and hold either side of thebutton to rapidly change the temperaturesetting in one degree increments to either65°F (18°C) or 85°F (29°C). If you want

continuous maximum cooling, push theside of the TEMP button until 60°F

(16°C) shows in the display window. TheEATC cools at maximum and disregards the60°F (16°C) setting until a warmer tempera-ture is selected. If you want continuousmaximum heating, push the side of theTEMP button until 90°F (32°C) shows in thedisplay window. The EATC provides maxi-mum heat regardless of the 90°F (32°C)setting until a cooler temperature is se-lected.

Fan speed and thumbwheelYour EATC automatically adjusts the fanspeed to the existing conditions. To controlthe fan speed yourself, use the thumbwheellocated at the extreme right side of theEATC control panel. Using the thumbwheelcancels the automatic fan speed control,and causes a to appear in the displaywindow. Rotate the thumbwheel up for HIspeeds and down for LO speeds.

To return to auto fan control, press theAUTOMATIC button.

Air flow controlYour EATC has five buttons which allow youto make special selections. The buttons are

grouped in the middle of the EATC paneland allow you to determine airflow location.Pressing any of the air control buttonschanges airflow location only, and does notaffect the ability of the system to controltemperature or fan speed. Return to fullyautomatic operation by pushing the AUTO-MATIC button.

Push this button for airflow to the front andrear floor outlets and windshield at the sametime. The indicator light comes on,and the display window shows the set tem-perature.

Push this button to obtain maximum airflowto the windshield. Adjust the temperaturesetting as required for defrosting. The

indicator light comes on, and thedisplay window shows the set temperature.When the outside temperature is about45°F (7°C) or above, the air is dehumidifiedto prevent window fogging.

Push this button to select airflow through


Z X

the instrument panel registers. Theindicator light comes on, and the

display window shows the set temperature.The EATC heats the air if the selectedtemperature is warmer than the outside aircoming into the vehicle. However, the air isnot cooled regardless of the temperaturesetting, unless the A/C button is selected.

Push this button to get air from the front andrear floor outlets and instrument panel ven-tilators at the same time. The indicatorlight comes on and the display windowshows the set temperature. The EATCheats the air if the selected temperature iswarmer than the outside air coming into thevehicle. However, the air is not cooled re-gardless of the temperature setting, unlessthe A/C button is selected.

Push this button to direct airflow to the frontand rear floor outlets. The indicatorlight comes on, and the display windowshows the set temperature. The EATCheats the air if the selected temperature iswarmer than the outside air coming into thevehicle. However, the air is not cooled re-

gardless of the temperature setting, unlessthe A/C button is selected.

Push the MAX button to choose air recircu-lation. In this mode the EATC system recir-culates the air inside the vehicle rather thandrawing air from outside. Air is distributedthrough the instrument panel ventilatorssimilar to mode. Use this mode to rap-idly cool the inside of the vehicle, or todehumidify the air inside the vehicle.

Activate the air conditioner in any of theoverride modes listed above by pressing theA/C button. The A/C indicator light comeson to verify activation, and cooled air flowsfrom the vents. Fan speed continues to becontrolled by the EATC unless the fanspeed thumbwheel is used to override.

English/metric modeSwitch from English to metric temperaturedisplay by simultaneously pressing the

and A/C buttons and holding thethumbwheel in upper position (HI) for onesecond.

WARNINGDo not switch temperature displayswhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

AHA1143


Z X

To operate the rear seat air conditioner, theengine must be running.

The rear seat air conditioner can be turnedon and off from the front controls. If the rearseat fan control lever on the front panel is setto OFF, the rear air conditioner is turned off.If it is set to any of the fan speed positions, airis discharged from the rear vents at thecorresponding speed. When the rear seatfan control lever on the front panel is set toREAR A/C, the rear seat passengers controltheir own fan speed.

The rear seat air conditioner only works whenthe front seat air conditioner is operating.

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

This dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

WHA0016

REAR SEAT AIRCONDITIONER (if so equipped)


Z X

The air conditioning system in your NISSANvehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm theearth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricantare required when servicing your NISSANair conditioner. Using improper refrigerantsor lubricants causes severe damage to yourair conditioning system. See ‘‘Air condition-ing system refrigerant and lubricant recom-mendations’’ in the ‘‘Technical and con-sumer information’’ section of this manual.

An authorized NISSAN dealer is able toservice your environmentally ‘‘friendly’’ airconditioning system.

WARNINGThe air conditioner system containsrefrigerant under high pressure. Toavoid personal injury, any air condi-tioner service should be done by anexperienced technician with properequipment.

SERVICING AIRCONDITIONING


Z X

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON andpress the power on switch to turn on theradio. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, the key should beturned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter,buildings, bridges, mountains and other ex-ternal influences. Intermittent changes inreception quality normally are caused bythese external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near thevehicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio receptionYour NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-hance radio reception. These circuits aredesigned to extend reception range, and toenhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general character-istics of both FM and AM radio signals thatcan affect radio reception quality in a mov-ing vehicle, even when the finest equipmentis used. These characteristics are com-

pletely normal in a given reception area,and do not indicate any malfunction in yourNISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly changebecause of vehicle movement. Buildings,terrain, signal distance and interferencefrom other vehicles can work against idealreception. Described below are some of thefactors that can affect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 to30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural(single channel) FM having slightly morerange than stereo FM. External influencesmay sometimes interfere with FM stationreception even if the FM station is within 25miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signalis directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signalsfollow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting manyof the same characteristics as light. Forexample they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves awayfrom a station transmitter, the signals willtend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interferencefrom buildings, large hills or due to antenna

position, usually in conjunction with in-creased distance from the station transmit-ter, static or flutter can be heard. This canbe reduced by adjusting the treble controlcounterclockwise to reduce treble re-sponse.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-tive characteristics of FM signals, direct andreflected signals reach the receiver at thesame time. The signals may cancel eachother, resulting in momentary flutter or lossof sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency,can bend around objects and skip along theground. In addition, the signals can bebounced off the ionosphere and bent backto earth. Because of these characteristics.AM signals are also subject to interferenceas they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areaswith many tall buildings. It can also occur forseveral seconds during ionospheric turbu-lence even in areas where no obstaclesexist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

AUDIO SYSTEM


Z X

power lines, electric signs and even trafficlights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAU-TIONS

Cassette player

● To maintain good quality sound,NISSAN recommends that you usecassette tapes of 60 minutes orshorter in length.

● Cassette tapes should be removedfrom the player when not in use.Store cassettes in their protectivecases and away from direct sunlight,heat, dust, moisture or magneticsources.

● Direct sunlight can cause the cas-sette to become deformed. The use ofdeformed cassettes may cause thecassette to jam in the player.

● Do not use cassettes that have peel-ing or loose labels. If used, the labelcould jam in the player.

● If a cassette has loose tape, insert apencil through one of the cassettehubs and rewind the tape firmly.

Loose tape may cause jamming andwavering sound quality.

● Over a period of time, the playbackhead, capstan and pinch roller maygather a tape coating residue as thetape passes over the head. This resi-due accumulation can cause a weakor wavering sound and should beremoved periodically with a headcleaning tape.

If the residue is not removed periodi-cally, the player may need to be dis-assembled for cleaning.

Compact Disc (CD) Player

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12cm) round discs that have the ‘‘COM-PACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO’’ logo onthe disc or packaging.

LHA0099


Z X

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to thehumidity. If this occurs, remove theCD and dehumidify or ventilate theplayer completely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannotfunction when the compartment tem-perature is extremely high. Decreasethe temperature before use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints,or that have pin holes may not workproperly.

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges


Z X

1. VOLUME - ON/OFF control

2. BASS/TREBLE select button3. BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE/FADE control

button4. BALANCE/FADE select button5. Tape eject button6. CLOCK button7. SCAN button8. AUTO SET button9. Radio tune button10. SHUFFLE/station memory #6 button11. COMPRESSION/station #5 memory

button12. Dolby/station memory #4 button13. Tape reverse/station memory #3 button14. FAST FORWARD/station memory #2

button15. REWIND/station memory #1 button16. FM band select button17. AM band select button18. SEEK button19. MUTE button20. CD button21. TAPE button

WHA0138


Z X

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTEPLAYER

NOTE: Audio control features include com-mand buttons for CD players which can beinstalled as optional equipment to upgradethe audio system. A CD player is not in-cluded with this system, but can be pur-chased as an option at any time. Consultwith an authorized NISSAN dealer for fea-ture availability.

Audio main operation

To turn the radio on, turn the ignition key toACC or ON. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, turn the key to the ACCposition.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter,buildings, bridges, mountains, and otherexternal influences. Intermittent changes inreception quality normally are caused byexternal influences.


Power/Volume control

Push the VOL knob to turn the radio on.Push the VOL knob once more to turn theradio OFF.

Turn the knob to the right to increase vol-ume or to the left to decrease volume. If theknob is set above a certain volume level andthe ignition is turned off, the volume willcome back on at a nominal listening levelwhen the ignition is turned back on.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-ance

Bass

Bass control allows you to adjust the lower,bass frequencies to your preference.

Push the BASS button and the setting indi-cator bar appears in the display window.Pressing the SELECT button either or

increases or decreases the level ofbass, as indicated by the number of barsegments showing in the display window.

Following bass adjustment, the display win-dow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

Treble

Treble control allows you to adjust thehigher, treble frequencies to your prefer-ence.

Push the TREB button and the setting indi-cator bar appears in the display window.Pressing the SELECT button either or

increases or decreases the level oftreble, as indicated by the number of barsegments showing in the display window.

Following treble adjustment, the displaywindow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

Balance

Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers.

Push the BAL button and the setting indica-tor bar appears in the display window. Pressthe SELECT button to shift the soundto the right speakers. The single indicatorbar moves to the right of the display win-dow. Press the SELECT button to shiftthe sound to the left speakers. The singleindicator bar moves to the left of the display


Z X

window. When the indicator bar is in thecenter position the sound is equally distrib-uted between the right and left speakers.

Following balance adjustment, the displaywindow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

Fader

Fader control allows you to adjust sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers.

Push the FADE button and the setting indi-cator bar appears in the display window.Press the SELECT button to shift thesound to the front speakers. The singleindicator bar moves to the right of the dis-play window. Press the SELECT button

to shift the sound to the rear speakers.The single indicator bar moves to the left ofthe display window. When the indicator baris in the center position the sound is equallydistributed between the front and rearspeakers.

Following fader adjustment, the display win-dow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

COMP button

Press this button to activate the compres-sion function. This reduces the dynamicrange, which provides the listener with amore consistent level of volume. The dis-play window shows a C when the COMPbutton is pushed.

Clock operationThe clock is on in the display regardless ofwhat mode, media, or function the radio is inas long as the ignition is in ACC or ON.

Clock setPress the RDS/CLK button until SELECTHOURS is displayed then use the SEL

buttons to change the hour, pressthe RDS/CLK button again until SELECTMINS is displayed then use the SEL

buttons to change the minutes.The display will return to clock priority modein 10 seconds or press the RDS/CLK buttonto return to the clock display.

Selecting the desired bandPush the AM or FM buttons to change to AMor FM band reception.The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broad-cast signal is weak, the radio automatically

changes from stereo to monaural reception.

FM-AM radio operation

MUTE button

Push the MUTE button to mute out theradio.

TUNE buttons

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Use the or buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the chan-nels, hold either of the tune buttons downfor more than 0.5 seconds.

AUTO SET

Press the AUTO button while listening to theradio to activate the auto set feature. WhenAUTO is depressed for less than 5 seconds,the display window momentarily indicatesAUTO ON, and the radio seeks the first sixstrong stations for the respective band. Thefirst six strong stations are then stored inorder in memory buttons one through six.


Z X

Only stations in the selected band are set,and the station seek begins from the lastfrequency stored in memory button six. IfAM, FM, SCAN, TUNE, SEEK, AUTO or amemory button is pushed while auto set isoperating, auto set is canceled and AUTOOFF shows in the display window.

AUTO LOAD

Press the AUTO button for longer than 5seconds while listening to the radio to acti-vate the auto load feature. When AUTO isdepressed for longer than 5 seconds, thedisplay window momentarily indicatesAUTO LOAD, and the radio seeks the firstsix strong stations for every band. The firstsix strong stations are then stored in orderin memory buttons one through six for eachband (AM, FM1, and FM2).

SEEK tuning

Push the SEEK or buttons to find thenext broadcast station. Pushing theSEEKS up and button SEEKS down.Pushing the button again continues the SEEKfunction. Once the highest broadcast stationis reached, the radio continues in the SEEKmode at the lowest station. Once the lowestbroadcast station is reached, the radio con-

tinues in the SEEK mode at the higheststation.

SCAN tuning

Push the SCAN tuning button, SCAN illumi-nates in the display. SCAN tuning beginsfrom low to high frequencies and stops ateach broadcasting station for 5 seconds.Pushing the button again during this 5 sec-ond period stops SCAN tuning and remainstuned to that station.

Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.Twelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2).

1. Push the FM or AM buttons to select AM,

AHA1107


Z X

FM1, or FM2. The selected band illumi-nates in the display.

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Push the desired station select button formore than 1.5 seconds. The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.

4. When the sound resumes, memorizing iscomplete.

5. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled.In that case, reset the desired stations.

RDS (Radio Data System)

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and isa data information service transmitted bysome radio stations on the FM band (notAM band) encoded within a regular radiobroadcast. Most RDS stations are currentlyin large cities, but many stations are nowconsidering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station name or call-sign, such as‘‘WHFR 98.3’’.

● Music or programming type such as‘‘Classical’’, ‘‘Country’’, or ‘‘Rock’’.

● Traffic reports about delays or construc-tion.

Using RDS

To turn RDS on push the RDS/CLK buttonuntil RDS OFF is displayed, then press theSEL button until RDS ON is displayed.

To change display type turn RDS ON thenuse the SEL button to choose between:

● SHOW TYPE - Music or program type.

● SHOW NAME - Station name or call-sign.

● SHOW NONE - No text display.

To choose traffic reports press theRDS/CLK button until TRAFFIC OFF is dis-played, the use then SEL button to chooseTRAFFIC ON, then use the seek or scancontrol to look for a station that may transmittraffic reports, the radio will display a‘‘TRAF’’ icon to show it is in traffic mode andtuned to a station that may transmit trafficreports. If the radio searches through thewhole band and then returns to the previousstation it was originally playing there are no

stations in the area that are transmittingtraffic reports.

If a cassette or compact disc is being playedwhile the traffic option is on and the stationpreviously tuned into displays a traffic bul-letin the radio will pause the cassette orcompact disc and broadcast the bulletin,then resume playing the cassette or com-pact disc.

Using RDS to search for programming type

Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stationstransmit call letters and frequencies only.Searching or scanning by program typemay yield a limited number of selections.

Press the RDS/CLK button until FINDCLASSIC is displayed, then use the SELbutton to choose between CLASSIC,COUNTRY, INFO, JAZZ, OLDIES, R&B,RELIGUS (Religious), ROCK, SOFT andTOP40. When you have chosen a programtype, use the SEEK, SCAN, or AUTOSETcontrols to look for a station transmitting thatkind of program. If the radio searchesthrough the whole band and then returns tothe previous station it was originally playingthere are no stations in the area that are


Z X

transmitting that type of programming.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition to ACC or ON, and care-fully insert a cassette tape into the tapedoor. The cassette tape automatically pullsinto the player and begins to play.

When a casssette is inserted into the audiosystem, the word TAPE and a cassette sidesymbol (either one or two) illuminates in thedisplay.

If the radio is already operating it automati-cally turns off and the cassette tape beginsto play. The cassette tape automaticallychanges direction to play the other sidewhen the first side is complete.

PLAY/STOP

Push the AM or FM buttons while the cas-sette tape is playing to stop the tape. Pushthe TAPE button to play the tape.

Changing the direction of tape play

Push the SIDE 1-2 select button to switchsides on the tape. The display will changefrom TAPE 1 PLAY to TAPE 2 PLAY.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)

Push the REW or FF button for the desireddirection.

The FF or REW symbol illuminates in thedisplay.

To stop the FF or REW function, press theFF or REW button again or the TAPE but-ton.

Dolby NR (Noise Reduction)

Push the button for Dolby NR encodedtapes to reduce high frequency tape noise.When activated, a appears in the dis-play window.

Dolby NR is manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora-tion. ‘‘Dolby NR’’ and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Li-censing Corporation.

AMS (Automatic Music Search)

Pushing the seek button while playing acassette tape activates the Automatic MusicSearch (AMS) mode. Press SEEK torewind the tape to the previous selection, orpress SEEK to forward the tape to thenext selection.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank inter-val within one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may notstop in the desired or expected location.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player is automatically set tohigh performance play when playing a metalor chrome tape.

TAPE EJECT

Push the EJ button. The cassette tapeautomatically comes out.


Z X

1. VOLUME - ON/OFF control

2. CD eject button

3. MUTE button

4. Tape eject button

5. TAPE/CD select button

6. AUTO SET button (if so equipped)

7. CLOCK button

8. BALANCE/FADE select button

9. SHUFFLE/station memory #6 button

10. COMPRESSION/station memory #5button

11. BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE/FADE/controlbutton

12. Dolby/station memory #4 button

13. Tape reverse/station memory #3 button

14. BASS/TREBLE select button

15. FAST FORWARD/station memory #2button

16. REWIND/station memory #1 button

17. SCAN button

18. TUNE button

19. SEEK button

20. AM/FM select button

WHA0139


Z X

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTEPLAYER AND COMPACT DISC(CD) PLAYER

Audio main operation

To turn the radio on, turn the ignition key toACC or ON. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, turn the key to the ACCposition.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter,buildings, bridges, mountains, and otherexternal influences. Intermittent changes inreception quality normally are caused byexternal influences.


Power/Volume control

Push the VOL knob to turn the radio on.Push the VOL knob once more to turn theradio OFF.

The control buttons are illuminated whenthe parking lamps or headlamps are on.Only the text for the active controls willilluminate for each specific type of media.

No bulbs or lights have malfunctioned. Forexample when a cassette tape is beingplayed, SHUFFLE will not illuminate.

Turn the knob to the right to increase vol-ume or to the left to decrease volume. If theknob is set above a certain volume level andthe ignition is turned off, the volume willcome back on at a nominal listening levelwhen the ignition is turned back on.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-ance

Bass

Bass control allows you to adjust the lower,bass frequencies to your preference.

Push the BASS button and the setting indi-cator bar appears in the display window.Pressing the SELECT button either or

increases or decreases the level ofbass, as indicated by the number of barsegments showing in the display window.

Following bass adjustment, the display win-dow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

Treble

Treble control allows you to adjust the higher,treble frequencies to your preference.

Push the TREB button and the setting indi-cator bar appears in the display window.Pressing the SELECT button either

increases or decreases the level oftreble, as indicated by the number of barsegments showing in the display window.

Following treble adjustment, the displaywindow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

Balance

Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers.

Push the BAL button and the setting indica-tor bar appears in the display window. Pressthe SELECT button to shift the soundto the right speakers. The single indicatorbar moves to the right of the display win-dow. Press the SELECT button to shiftthe sound to the left speakers. The singleindicator bar moves to the left of the displaywindow. When the indicator bar is in thecenter position the sound is equally distrib-


Z X

uted between the right and left speakers.

Following balance adjustment, the displaywindow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

Fader

Fader control allows you to adjust sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers.

Push the FADE button and the setting indi-cator bar appears in the display window.Press the SELECT button to shift thesound to the front speakers. The singleindicator bar moves to the right of the dis-play window. Press the SELECT button

to shift the sound to the rear speakers.The single indicator bar moves to the left ofthe display window. When the indicator baris in the center position the sound is equallydistributed between the front and rearspeakers.

Following fader adjustment, the display win-dow shows the current setting for threeseconds, then returns to the display prior toadjustment.

COMP button

Press this button to activate the compres-sion function. This reduces the dynamicrange, which provides the listener with amore consistent level of volume. The dis-play window shows COMP when the COMPbutton is pushed.

Clock operation

The clock is on in the display regardless ofwhat mode, media, or function the radio is inas long as the ignition is in ACC or ON.

Clock set

Press the RDS/CLK button until SELECTHOURS is displayed then use the SEL

buttons to change the hour, pressthe RDS/CLK button again until SELECTMINS is displayed then use the SEL

buttons to change the minutes.The display will return to the previous radiostation, tape or CD that was being playedprevious to setting the clock in 7 seconds oryou may press the RDS/CLK button until theprevious display appears.

Selecting the desired band

Push the AM buttons to change to AM bandor push the FM button to change to FM1 orFM2 band reception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminatesduring FM stereo reception. When the ste-reo broadcast signal is weak, the radioautomatically changes from stereo to mon-aural reception.

FM-AM Radio operation

MUTE button

Push the MUTE button to mute out theradio.

TUNE buttons

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Use the or buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the chan-nels, hold either of the tune buttons downfor more than 0.5 seconds.


Z X

AUTO SET

Press the AUTO button while listening to theradio to activate the auto set feature. WhenAUTO is depressed for less than 5 seconds,the display window momentarily indicatesAUTO ON, and the radio seeks the first sixstrong stations for the respective band. Thefirst six strong stations are then stored inorder in memory buttons one through six.

Only stations in the selected band are set,and the station seek begins from the lastfrequency stored in memory button six. IfAM, FM, SCAN, TUNE, SEEK, AUTO or amemory button is pushed while auto set isoperating, auto set is canceled and AUTOOFF shows in the display window.

AUTO LOAD

Press the AUTO button for longer than 5seconds while listening to the radio to acti-vate the auto load feature. When AUTO isdepressed for longer than 5 seconds, thedisplay window momentarily indicatesAUTO LOAD, and the radio seeks the firstsix strong stations for every band. The firstsix strong stations are then stored in orderin memory buttons one through six for eachband (AM, FM1, and FM2).

SEEK tuning

Push the SEEK or buttons to find thenext broadcast station. Pushing theSEEKS up and button SEEKS down.Pushing the button again continues the SEEKfunction. Once the highest broadcast stationis reached, the radio continues in the SEEKmode at the lowest station. Once the lowestbroadcast station is reached, the radio con-tinues in the SEEK mode at the higheststation.

SCAN tuning

Push the SCAN tuning button, SCAN illumi-nates in the display. SCAN tuning beginsfrom low to high frequencies and stops ateach broadcasting station for 5 seconds.Pushing the button again during this 5 sec-ond period stops SCAN tuning and remainstuned to that station.

Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.Twelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2).

1. Push the FM or AM buttons to select AM,

AHA1108


Z X

FM1, or FM2. The selected band illumi-nates in the display.

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Push the desired station select button formore than 1.5 seconds. The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.

4. When the sound resumes, memorizing iscomplete.

5. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled.In that case, reset the desired stations.

RDS (Radio Data System)

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and isa data information service transmitted bysome radio stations on the FM band (notAM band) encoded within a regular radiobroadcast. Most RDS stations are currentlyin large cities, but many stations are nowconsidering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station name or call-sign, such as‘‘WHFR 98.3’’.

● Music or programming type such as‘‘Classical’’, ‘‘Country’’, or ‘‘Rock’’.

● Text Messages such as telephone num-bers for dial in requests, advertisementsand other simple messages.

● Traffic reports about delays or construc-tion.

Using RDS

To turn RDS on push the RDS/CLK buttonuntil RDS OFF is displayed, then press theSEL button until RDS ON is displayed.

To change display type turn RDS ON thenuse the SEL button to choose between:

● SHOW TYPE - Music or program type.

● SHOW NAME - Station name or call-sign.

● SHOW TEXT - Text Messages such astelephone numbers for dial in requests,advertisements and other simple mes-sages.

● SHOW NONE - No text display.

To choose traffic reports press theRDS/CLK button until TRAFFIC OFF is dis-played, the use then SEL button to choose

TRAFFIC ON, then use the seek or scancontrol to look for a station that may transmittraffic reports, the radio will display a‘‘TRAF’’ icon to show it is in traffic mode andtuned to a station that may transmit trafficreports. If the radio searches through thewhole band and then returns to the previousstation it was originally playing there are nostations in the area that are transmittingtraffic reports.

If a cassette or compact disc is being playedwhile the traffic option is on and the stationpreviously tuned into displays a traffic bul-letin the radio will pause the cassette orcompact disc and broadcast the bulletin,then resume playing the cassette or com-pact disc.

Using RDS to search for programming type

Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stationstransmit call letters and frequencies only.Searching or scanning by program typemay yield a limited number of selections.

Press the RDS/CLK button until FINDCLASSIC is displayed, then use the SELbutton to choose between CLASSIC,COUNTRY, INFO, JAZZ, RELIGUS (Reli-


Z X

gious), ROCK, SOFT and TOP40. Whenyou have chosen a program type, use theSEEK, SCAN, or AUTOSET controls to lookfor a station transmitting that kind of pro-gram. If the radio searches through thewhole band and then returns to the previousstation it was originally playing there are nostations in the area that are transmitting thattype of programming.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition to ACC or ON, and care-fully insert a cassette tape into the tapedoor. The cassette tape automatically pullsinto the player and begins to play.

When a casssette is inserted into the audiosystem, the word TAPE illuminates in thedisplay to inform you that there is a tape inthe radio.

If the radio is already operating it automati-cally turns off the CD or radio station and thecassette tape begins to play and TAPE 1PLAY is displayed. TAPE 1 PLAY indicatesside 1 is playing on the tape currenty. Thecassette tape automatically changes direc-tion to play the other side when the first sideis complete and will display TAPE 2 PLAY.

PLAY/STOP

Push the CD, AM, or FM button while thecassette tape is playing to stop the tape.Push the TAPE button to play the tape.

Changing the direction of tape play

Push the SIDE 1-2 select button to switchsides on the tape. The display will changefrom TAPE 1 PLAY to TAPE 2 PLAY.


Push the REW or FF button for the desireddirection.

When REW is pushed TAPE 1 REW illumi-nates on the display (TAPE 2 REW willilluminate if on side 2). When FF is pushedTAPE 2 FF illuminates on the display (TAPE2 FF will illuminate if on side 2). To stop theFF or REW function, press the FF or REWbutton again or the TAPE button.

Dolby NR (Noise Reduction)

Push the button for Dolby NR encodedtapes to reduce high frequency tape noise.When activated, a appears in the dis-play window.

Dolby NR is manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora-

tion. ‘‘Dolby NR’’ and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Li-censing Corporation.

AMS (Automatic Music Search)

Pushing the seek button while playing acassette tape activates the Automatic MusicSearch (AMS) mode. Press SEEK torewind the tape to the previous selection, orpress SEEK to forward the tape to thenest selection.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank inter-val within one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may notstop in the desired or expected location.

Metal or chrome tape usage

The cassette player is automatically set tohigh performance play when playing a metalor chrome tape.

TAPE EJECT

Push the EJ button. The cassette tapeautomatically come out.

Compact Disc (CD) player opera-tionTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON


Z X

position and carefully insert the compactdisc into the slot with the label side up. Thecompact disc is automatically pulled into theslot and starts to play.

If the radio or cassette tape is alreadyoperating, it automatically turns off and thecompact disc begins to play.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

TAPE/CD

When the CD side of the TAPE/CD button ispushed with the compact disc loaded andthe tape or the radio playing, the tape orradio turns off and the compact disc starts toplay.


When the FF or REW button is pushedwhile the compact disc is playing, the com-pact disc plays at an increased speed whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the but-ton is released, the compact disc returns tonormal play speed.

SEEK or

When the SEEK button is pushed while thecompact disc is playing, the next selectionfollowing the present one starts to play fromthe beginning. Push the SEEK button sev-eral times to skip several selections. Eachtime the button is pushed, the CD advancesone additional selection. The number appearsin the display window. (When the last selec-tion on the compact disc is skipped, the firstselection is played.)When the SEEK button is pushed, the se-lection being played returns to the beginning.Push the SEEK button several times to skipback several selections. Each time the buttonis pushed, the CD moves back one selection.

SHUFFLEWhen the SHUFFLE button is pressed thetracks on the CD are played at random, notfollowing the sequence on the compact disc.The same program may be repeated twice.

CD EJECTWhen the EJ button is pushed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc ejects.

When the EJ button is pushed while thecompact disc is playing, the disc ejects andthe system turns off.

If the compact disc ejects and is not re-moved within 10 seconds, it is pulled backinto the slot.

DISC indicator light

DISC illuminates when a compact disc isloaded into the player.


Z X

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(if so equipped)The compact disc player consists of twomain components; the 6 CD magazine andthe CD changer. Both components are lo-cated on the center instrument panel con-sole, below the ashtray.

How to load the CD magazineTo load the magazine with CDs, first pushthe EJECT button on the CD changer toeject the magazine, then remove the maga-zine from the changer. The inside of the CDmagazine contains six shelves, one for

each CD to be loaded. Carefully slide a CD(label side up) onto one of the shelves andpush it in. Repeat as desired, loading up tosix CDs.

CD magazine insertOnce the desired number of CDs are loadedinto the magazine, insert the magazine backinto the CD changer.

With the ignition switch OFF, the CD maga-zine loads into the CD changer. Once theignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, theaudio system returns to its previous mode.

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, the CD magazine loads into theCD changer and begins play with disc one,track one.

CD button

Push this button to switch from radio or tapemode to CD mode. CD play begins auto-matically if at least one disc is loaded in themagazine. The display window shows theCD number for three seconds, then the tracknumber for three seconds, then displaysboth together for the remainder of the track.

If the CD button is pushed while in the radioor tape mode, and there are no CDs loadedin the magazine, the display window flashesa NO DISC message for 4 seconds.

CD Player controlsSEEK

Push SEEK to select the previoustrack number, or push SEEK to selectthe next track number. After the last track ona disc, pushing SEEK selects the firsttrack of the same disc.

SELECT DISCS

Push TUNE to select the previous CDin the magazine. Push TUNE to select

AHA1064


Z X

the next CD in the magazine.

SCAN

Push this button to audition the first 10seconds of each track on a disc. At the endof the disc, the SCAN function continueswith the first track on the same disc. Thedisplay window flashes the track numberbeing auditioned during the SCAN function.

FF (Fast Forward)

Press this button to advance the CD mecha-nism and move ahead on the disc. If held forless than three seconds, this button causesthe CD to advance at three times the normalplay speed. If held for more than threeseconds, the CD advances at 10 times thenormal play speed.

The volume decreases and the display win-dow shows the elapsed time during theentire fast forward period.

REW (Rewind)

Press this button to reverse the CD mecha-nism and move back to a previous point onthe disc. If held for less than three seconds,this button causes the CD to reverse atthree times the normal play speed. If heldfor more than three seconds, the CD re-

verses at 10 times the normal play speed.

The mechanism reverses to the beginningof track 1 and begins play if the button isheld continuously. The volume decreasesand the display window shows the elapsedtime during the entire fast reverse period.

COMP (Compression)

Press this button to activate the compres-sion function. This function reduces thedynamic range of the CD program material,which provides the listener with a moreconsistent level of volume. The display win-dow shows a C or COMP (dual media radio)when the compression button is pushed.

SHUFFLE

Press this button to randomly select the playorder of the tracks on a CD. When all tracksof one CD have been played, the systemchanges to the next CD in the magazineand proceeds to play the tracks in a ran-domly selected order. The shuffle featureremains in effect until turned off by pressingthe SHUFFLE button again.

When the shuffle function is activated,SHUFFLE illuminates in the display.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch thesurface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storagecase when they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges by

LHA0049


Z X

rubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROLS (if soequipped)The radio controls mounted on the right sideof the steering wheel provide convenientaccess to three commonly used functions:

VOL, VOL, and NEXT. Use theNEXT button to select the next pre-programmed station (AM/FM), the next se-lection on the tape, or the next selection onthe CD.

AHA1063


Z X

REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if soequipped)

Radio features controlled by the rear seatremote control (if so equipped) are listedbelow:

● Volume: −/+

● Media select: AM/FM, tape, CD, CDchanger.

● Speakers ON/OFF

● Mem: proceed to the next preset station(AM/FM).

● Seek: b c

Push the Memory three and Memory fivebuttons on the front radio controls simulta-neously to turn the rear controls on. Pushthem again to turn the rear audio controls off.

The (headphones symbol) illuminatesin the front display when the rear audiocontrols are on. Two headphone jacks areprovided so two rear seat passengers maylisten to the audio system privately.

The rear volume controls can only increasethe volume to the level at which the frontradio volume control is set.

Headphones are not included with the ve-hicle. Most portable radio headphones workwith the rear audio controls.

For vehicles equipped with the premiumFM-AM radio with cassette player, compactdisc player and 6 disc CD player, if the rearpassengers turn off the rear speakers andare using headphones they may choose tolisten to a different media than the frontpassengers. The rear passengers can listento the radio while the front passengers canlisten to the same thing, a cassette tape,

AHA1060


Z X

CD, or the CD changer. The radio will gointo DUAL PLAY mode and the rear pas-sengers can use the rear controls to changemedia.

VOLUME button

The VOLUME button allows the rear pas-sengers to adjust the headphone volumelevel.

MEDIA button

The MEDIA button allows the rear passen-ger to change between AM, FM1, FM2,TAPE, CD, and CD DJ. The media optionsare listed on the faceplate of the rear audiocontrols. When a source of media is se-lected, that media selection is backlit.

MEM button

In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode the MEM buttonallows the rear passenger to successivelyaccess memory preset station 1 through 6.

In CD DJ mode the MEM button allows therear passengers to select other compactdiscs in the CD changer.

SEEK button

In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode the SEEKand button allows the rear pas-

sengers to find the next radio station up ordown the station band frequency.

In TAPE mode the SEEK andbutton allows the rear passengers use Au-tomatic Music Search (AMS) to find the nextor previous song on the cassette.

In CD mode the SEEK and buttonallows the rear passengers to find the nextor previous selection on the CD.

In CD DJ mode the SEEK andbutton allows the rear passengers to findthe next or previous selection on the CD.

For vehicles equipped with the FM-AM radiowith cassette player, when the rear seatcontrols are on, push the SPKRS ON-OFFbutton to turn all speakers off. Push again toturn all speakers on.

For vehicles equipped with the premiumFM-AM radio with cassette player, compactdisc player and 6 disc CD player, when therear seat controls are on, push the SPKRSON-OFF button to turn the rear speakersoff. Push again to turn the rear speakers on.

If the rear audio system was on when theignition was turned OFF, the audio system‘‘remembers’’ and the rear system is still onwhen the engine is started again. The sys-tem also ‘‘remembers’’ if the speakers wereON or OFF. Therefore, the speakers mayhave to be turned on again by pressing theSPKRS ON-OFF button or turning the rearaudio controls off.


Z X

ANTENNAThe manual antenna on your vehicle re-mains in the up position at all times. Theantenna cannot be shortened, but can beremoved. When you need to remove theantenna, turn the antenna rod counterclock-wise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antennaclockwise. Tighten the antenna rod to speci-fication using a suitable tool such as aopen-end wrench. The antenna rod tighten-ing specification is 3.4 - 3.6 Nzm (30 - 32in-lb). Do not use pliers to tighten the an-tenna as they can leave marks on the an-tenna surface. The antenna rod cannot behand tightened to the proper specification.

CAUTIONAlways properly tighten the antennarod during installation or the antennarod may break during vehicle operation.

WARNING● The Autovision T Family Entertain-

ment System (FES) is designed forrear seat passenger viewing only.

● The driver must not attempt to oper-ate the FES while the vehicle is inmotion so that full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION● The glass screen on the liquid crys-

tal display may break if hit with ahard or sharp object. If the glassbreaks, do not touch the liquid crys-talline material, which contains asmall amount of mercury. In case ofcontact with skin, wash immediatelywith soap and water.

● Avoid pinching fingers when remov-ing and reinstalling the player.

● Do not insert foreign objects into thevideo player.

● To prevent damage when reinstall-ing the player, be sure of properalignment when inserting. Do notforce.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when clean-ing the Autovision T Family Enter-tainment System components. Donot use solvents or cleaning solu-tions.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions (be-low 30° or above 113° F).

LHA0088

AUTOVISIONT FAMILYENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM(FES) (if so equipped)


Z X

● To avoid draining the vehicle bat-tery, do not operate the system morethan 15 minutes without starting theengine.

Video Cassette Player (VCP) con-trols

The VCP has the following controls:

● LED display - The display lamp willilluminate when power is supplied to theVCP.

● Power button - Press to turn the VCPON or OFF. When the power is ON, theother buttons will illuminate.

● PLAY button - Press to play a videocas-sette tape.

● REWIND/REVIEW button - When in

PLAY mode, pressing the button re-verses the picture. When in STOPmode, the videocassette tape will rewindat high speed.

● FAST FORWARD/CUE button - Whenin PLAY mode, pressing the button for-wards the picture. When in STOP mode,the videocassette tape will fast-forwardat high speed.

● STOP button - Press to stop the video-cassette tape.

● HEADPHONE VOLUME buttons - Pressto adjust the headphone volume. (Homeuse only).

● EJECT button - Press to eject the vid-eocassette tape.

LHA0090


Z X

Remote control

The remote control has the following con-trols:

● POWER button - Press to turn the VCPON or OFF.

● ENCORE button - Press to reverse thevideocassette tape for 5 seconds. Nor-mal playback will then resume.

● STILL/ADVANCE button - Press to tem-porarily suspend playback. Press againto make the videocassette tape advanceone frame at a time.

● RETRACKING button - Press to activateAuto Tracking.

● TRACKING 1 button - Press for manualtracking adjustment.

● TRACKING 2 button - Press for manualtracking adjustment.

● PLAY button - Press to play a videocas-sette tape.

● REW button - Press to rewind the vid-eocassette tape.

● FF button - Press to fast-forward thevideocassette tape.

● STOP button - Press to stop the video-cassette tape.

Battery Replacement

Batteries are supplied with the remote con-trol unit.

Slide the battery cover off to access thebatteries, and only use alkaline batteries asreplacements. If you will not be using theremote control for long periods of time,remove the batteries.

Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions at

extremely close distances to the FES or notat all.

LHA0091


Z X

Flip-down screenCAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crys-tal display may break if hit with ahard or sharp object. If the glassbreaks, do not touch the liquid crys-talline material, which contains asmall amount of mercury. In case ofcontact with skin, wash immediatelywith soap and water.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

Playing a videocassette tape

CAUTION

● Do not insert foreign objects into theVCP.

● Only operate the VCP while the ve-hicle engine is running. Operatingthe VCP for extended periods of timewith the engine OFF can dischargethe vehicle battery.

● Do not leave a videocassette tape inthe VCP for extended periods of time.

The FES is automatically activated whenthe vehicle ignition and radio are both ON.

Open the floor console and insert the video-cassette tape into the Video CassettePlayer (VCP). The videocassette tape willstart to play automatically.

● The system will not allow a videocas-sette to be inserted in the wrong position.

● The VCP and floor console coversshould remain closed when the video-cassette is playing.

● When the ignition is turned ON, audio isset to low volume through the head-phones. Press the VOLUME button onthe RSEM to increase the volume. Tolisten through the vehicle’s speaker sys-tem, press the speaker control button.

To remove the videocassette tape, pressthe STOP button and then press the EJECTbutton. When the engine is turned OFF, thevideocassette tape is automatically ejectedfrom the VCP.

To play a video game1. Connect the video line from your video

game device to the VIDEO jack.

2. Connect the audio cable to the left andright AUDIO jacks.

3. Press the MEDIA button to activate theAUX mode. The LCD screen will turn onand the AUX indicator will illuminate.

4. If desired, press the speaker control but-ton and plug a headphone into the head-phone jack. With the headphones ON,the rear speakers will not operate.

LHA0092


Z X

Removing and installing VCPPress down on the release lever and care-fully pull up on the VCP. To install, carefullyslide the VCP into the case until you hear itclick into place. Do not force the VCP intothe console. Make sure no objects are in theconsole prior to installation.

NOTE:

The FES may be equipped with a secu-rity screw. If you have difficulty remov-ing the VCP, check to see if the securityscrew is installed. The security screw islocated on the driver’s side of the con-sole near the floor. The security screwcan be removed using a tamper resistantTorx ® bit (size T20). If you need assis-tance, please see your Nissan dealer.

REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENTMODULE (RSEM) (if so equipped)

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operatethe RSEM while the vehicle is in motionso that full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

The RSEM is automatically activated whenthe vehicle ignition and radio are bothturned ON. The headphones symbol illumi-nates in the front radio display when therear audio controls are on. Press the three

LHA0089 LHA0095 LHA0093


Z X

and five memory preset buttons to turn OFFthe RSEM.

VOLUME button

The VOLUME button allows the rear pas-sengers to adjust the headphone volumelevel.

Push the 1 button to increase the volume.

Push the 2 button to decrease the volume.

MEDIA button

The MEDIA button allows the rear passen-gers to change between the different mediaoptions. When a source of media is se-lected, that media selection is backlit.

● AM - AM radio frequency band

● FM1, FM2 - FM radio frequency bands

● TAPE - cassette tape

● CD - single CD player (if so equipped)

● CD DJ - CD changer (if so equipped)

● VCP - video cassette player

● AUX - auxiliary jack input

MEM button

In AM, FM1 or FM2 mode, the MEM buttonallows the rear passengers to successivelyaccess memory preset stations 1 through 6.

In CD DJ mode, the MEM button allows therear passengers to select other compactdiscs in the CD changer. Play will begin withthe first track.

SEEK button

In AM, FM1 or FM2 mode, the SEEK < and> buttons allow the rear passengers to findthe next radio station up or down the stationband frequency.

In TAPE mode, the SEEK < and > buttonsallow the rear passengers to use AutomaticMusic Search (AMS) to find the next orprevious song on the cassette.

In CD mode, the SEEK < and > buttonsallow the rear passengers to find the next orprevious selection on the CD.

In CD DJ mode, the SEEK < and > buttonsallow the rear passengers to find the next orprevious selection on the CD.

Speaker control button

With the speakers ON, rear seat passen-gers can adjust the audio output to allsystem speakers - both front and rear to-gether (headphones are disabled in thismode). The rear seat passengers cannotraise the volume of the system above thelevel of the front radio.

With the speakers OFF, the headphonesare enabled. The rear seat passengershave control over the desired headphonevolume levels.

Headphone jacks

Two headphone jacks are available so tworear seat passengers may listen to theaudio system.

Headphones are not included with the ve-hicle. Most portable radio headphones willwork with the rear audio controls.

Auxiliary input jacksThe auxiliary input jacks on the RSEM con-trol panel accept video and audio connec-tors for all standard video games. Othercompatible devices such as DVD players,camcorders and portable CD players can


Z X

also be connected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for iden-tification purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

DUAL PLAY mode

Dual Play Mode allows the rear seat pas-sengers to listen to one media source whilethe front seat passengers listen to another.To activate, press the speaker control but-ton and plug a headphone into the head-phone jack. With the headphones ON, therear speaker will not operate. Select thedesired media and adjust as necessary.Press the speaker control button again tooperate the rear speakers and disengageDual Play Mode.

IN-HOME use

Your AutovisionT Family EntertainmentSystem is UL registered for in-home use.

To use the FES system in your home, youwill need:

● 12V DC power converter rated for 1.5amps/minute

● Patch cords with RCA style connectors

CARE AND MAINTENANCEUse a lightly dampened, lint free cloth toclean the surfaces of your Family Entertain-ment System. (VCP face, monitor screen,remote control, etc.)

CAUTION● Do not use any solvents or cleaning

solutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on themonitor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching themonitor screen as it may becomedirty or damaged.

Your Family Entertainment System is com-patible with any cassette tape bearing theVHS mark. We recommend storing yourvideo cassettes in a moisture free, dust freecontainer.

CAUTION● Do not attempt to operate the system

in extreme temperature conditions(below 30° and above 113° Fahren-heit).

● Do not attempt to operate the systemin extreme humidity conditions (lessthan 10% or more than 75%).

Tape head cleaningNormally the VCP will not require frequenthead cleaning. However, after long periodsof usage dirt can collect on the video heads,causing the picture to become blurred orinterrupted. In this case, head cleaning maybe required.

To clean the video heads, obtain a headcleaning tape from your local video store.Be sure to completely follow the instructionsincluded with the cleaning tape. Excessivecleaning can shorten video head life.


Z X

TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following troubleshooting chart to remedy symptoms you may experience. If the problem is not readily corrected, consult yourNissan dealer for assistance.

SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION

No power. Vehicle ignition is ON, power indi-cator is OFF.

VCP is not plugged in. Plug in VCPBlown fuse. Replace fuse.

VCP does not operate. Power indicator isflashing.

The VCP has condensation and the protectioncircuit is operating.

Wait until the VCP becomes dry inside. This maytake several hours.

The temperature is too high and the protec-tion circuit is operating.

Wait until vehicle cabin temperature cools down.

Power indicator LED is off. The fuse may be burned out. Replace fuse.The wiring is incomplete. Check the wire connections and connect it prop-

erly.The picture has shadows, stripes, or spots. Tracking needs to be adjusted. Adjust tracking.

Video tape is bad. Try another video tape.The screen is dark. The brightness is adjusted too low. Check that brightness is properly adjusted and set

it properly.The temperature in the vehicle is below 30°For above 113°F.

Check again when the temperature is between30°F and 113°F.

The power was turned off when driving onbumpy roads.

Severe vibration to the operation panel acti-vated the DEW/HEAT sensor.

Press the POWER button again to turn the powerON.

No sound through headphone. Poor connection. Check jack.No sound through vehicle speakers. Speaker control button is in OFF position. Check speaker control button. Disable the RSEM.Desire radio, but video system sound is heardthrough vehicle’s speakers.

Media button is set to VCP. Turn radio on.


Z X

SPECIFICATIONS

VCP General Specifications● Format VHS standard● Signal system Standard NTSC 3.58● Recording system Rotary double azimuth

Four head helical scanning● Video heads DA-4 Rotary heads● Audio heads Lineary: 1/HiFi : 2 Rotary● Control head 1 Stationary● Erase 1 Full Track; 1 Audio● Loading Central loading● Sensors Dew, Heat● Power consumption 12W● Power requirement DC 12V● Dimensions (WxHxD) 265 x 94 x 260 (mm)● Weight 2.7 kg

VCP● S/N ratio More than 70dB A-wt for Hi-Fi,

1kHzMore than 60dB A-wt for Lin-ear, 1kHz

● Frequency response 0 6 3dB, 20Hz ~ 20 kHz

Video Monitor Specifications● Display type Color TFT active matrix LCD● Screen size 6.49 (Actual panel size)● Pixels 320X234● Screen resolution 224,640 dots● Power source voltage DC 11-15V● Power consumption 0.8 Max. (0.8A or less)● Operation temperature 30°F - 113°F

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found tocomply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuantto Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

NOTE: This equipment may experience radio frequencyinterference from cellular phone, two-way and CB radio.


Z X

Microphone installed modelIf equipped with a genuine NISSAN cellularphone, your NISSAN features a non-directional microphone in the steering col-umn cover, so it is not necessary to look ator speak directly into the microphone whencalling.

To do so could detract from the drivingoperation and cause an accident.

See the manual for car phone operation.

Pre-wired and antenna for phoneinstalled modelSome models are pre-wired to accept thegenuine NISSAN cellular phone.

In addition, the same model has the phoneantenna built into the rear glass window.

When installing a CB ham radio, a carphone or other transmitters in your NISSAN,be sure to observe the following cautions,otherwise the new equipment may ad-versely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injec-tion) system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not beused while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.Some jurisdictions prohibit the useof cellular telephones while driving.

● If you must make a call while yourvehicle is in motion, the hands freecellular phone operational mode (ifso equipped) is highly recom-mended. Exercise extreme cautionat all times so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopyour vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION● Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the Electronic ControlModule (ECM).

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8in. (20 cm) away from the MultiportFuel Injection harness. Do not routethe antenna wire next to any har-ness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by the manu-facturer.

● Connect the ground wire from theCB radio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

AHA1049

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


Z X

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...................5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .......................5-2Three-way catalyst ............................................5-2Avoiding collision and rollover...........................5-3Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving....................5-3

Ignition switch.........................................................5-4Key positions .....................................................5-4

Before starting the engine......................................5-5Starting the engine.................................................5-5Driving the vehicle..................................................5-6Parking brake .........................................................5-9Cruise control .......................................................5-10

Precautions on cruise control..........................5-10Cruise control operations ................................5-10

Break-in schedule ................................................5-11

Increasing fuel economy ......................................5-12Parking/parking on hills ........................................5-13Power steering .....................................................5-14Brake system........................................................5-14

Braking precautions.........................................5-14Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .........................5-14

Cold weather driving ............................................5-16Freeing a frozen door lock ..............................5-16Anti-freeze .......................................................5-16Battery .............................................................5-16Draining of coolant water ................................5-16Tire equipment.................................................5-16Special winter equipment ................................5-17Driving on snow or ice.....................................5-17Engine block heater (if so equipped) ..............5-18

Z X

WARNINGDo not leave children, impaired adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. Theycould accidently injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operationof the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunnydays, temperatures in a closed vehiclecould quickly become high enough tocause severe or possibly fatal injuriesto people or animals.

EXHAUST GAS(Carbon Monoxide)

WARNINGDo not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconsciousnessor death.● If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive withall windows fully open, and have thevehicle inspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closedspaces such as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the en-gine running for any extended lengthof time.

● Keep the rear door and rear windowclosed while driving, otherwise ex-haust gases could be drawn into thepassenger compartment. If you mustdrive with the back door or rear win-dow open, follow these procedures:1. Open all the windows.2. Set the air flow control dial to the

position and turn the fancontrol dial to 4 (high) to circulatethe air.

● If electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the back door orbody, follow the trailer manufactur-er’s recommendation to prevent car-bon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and bodyshould be inspected by a qualifiedmechanic whenever:a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumesare entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involv-ing damage to the exhaust system,underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYSTThe three-way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaust system.Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst areburned at high temperatures to help reducepollutants.

WARNING● The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,animals or flammable materialsaway from the exhaust system com-ponents.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. Theymay ignite and cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHENSTARTING AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Z X

CAUTION● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-

its from leaded gasoline seriouslyreduce the three-way catalyst’s abil-ity to help reduce exhaust pollut-ants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause over-rich fuel flow into the three-way cata-lyst, causing it to overheat. Do notkeep driving if the engine misfires,or if noticeable loss of performanceor other unusual operating condi-tions are detected. Have the vehicleinspected promptly by an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the three-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warm-ing it up.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNINGFailure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in lossof control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or suddensteering maneuvers, because these drivingpractices could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss ofcontrol could result in a collision withother vehicles or objects, or cause thevehicle to roll over, particularly if theloss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times,and avoid driving when tired. Never drivewhen under the influence of alcohol ordrugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-ness). Always wear your seat belt as out-lined in the “Seats, restraints andsupplemental air bag systems” section ofthis manual, and also instruct your passen-gers to do so.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGSAND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-stream reduces coordination, delaysreaction time and impairs judgement.Driving after drinking alcohol increasesthe likelihood of being involved in anaccident injuring yourself and others.Additionally, if you are injured in anaccident alcohol can increase the se-verity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-ever, you must choose not to drive underthe influence of alcohol. Every year thou-sands of people are injured or killed inalcohol related accidents. Although the locallaws vary on what is considered to belegally intoxicated, the fact is alcohol affectsall people differently and most people un-derestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that’s true for drugs, too (over thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs).Don’t drive if your ability to operate your

Starting and driving 5-3

Z X

vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, orsome other physical condition.

The ignition switch includes an anti-theftsteering lock device. The key can only beremoved when the ignition switch is in theLOCK position.

The ignition lock is designed so the keycannot be turned to LOCK and removeduntil the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

The shift lever is designed so it cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition key isturned to LOCK, or if the key is removedfrom the switch.

The shift lever can be moved out of P(Park) only after the ignition switch is inthe ON position, and the foot brake pedalis depressed.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the keyto the LOCK position. Remove the key.To unlock the steering wheel, insert thekey and turn it gently while rotating thesteering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock. This may cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle andcould result in serious vehicle damageor personal injury.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

OFF

The engine can be turned off without lockingthe steering wheel, if the key is left in theignition.

WSD0002

IGNITION SWITCH


Z X

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio when the engine isnot running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition systemand the electrical accessories.

START

This position activates the starter motor,which starts the engine.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, eachtime you check engine oil).

● Check that all windows and lights areclean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengersto do likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lightswhen key is turned to the ON position.See ‘‘Warning/Indicator lights and audiblereminders’’ in the ‘‘Instrument and con-trols’’ section.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral) (P is recommended).

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P and into any of theother gear positions under the follow-ing conditions:

● The ignition key is turned to theLOCK position.

● The ignition key is turned to the ONposition without depressing thefoot brake pedal.

The starter will not operate if the shiftselector lever is in one of the drivingpositions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, butfails to run, repeat the above procedure.

— If the engine is very hard to start inextremely cold or hot weather, de-press the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it to help start theengine.

BEFORE STARTING THEENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE


Z X

— In the summer, when restarting theengine within 30 minutes after it hasbeen stopped, keep the acceleratorpedal slightly depressed while start-ing.

CAUTIONDo not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, other-wise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Drive at moderatespeeds for a short distance first, espe-cially in cold weather.

WARNING● Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N(Neutral) to: R (Reverse), D (Drive),2 or 1. Always depress the brakepedal until shifting is completed.Failure to do so could cause you tolose control and have an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, souse caution when shifting into a for-ward or reverse gear before the en-gine has warmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould cause an accident.

CAUTION● When stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicleby depressing the accelerator pedal.The foot brakes should be used forthis purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slip-pery roads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

The automatic transmission in your vehicleis electronically controlled by a transmissioncontrol module to produce maximum powerand smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the rec-ommended operating procedures for thistransmission. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance and drivingenjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

● After starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal before shifting the selectorlever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive), 2 or 1 position. Be sure thevehicle is at a complete stop before at-tempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission is designedso the brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any otherposition while the ignition switch is ON.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


Z X

The selector lever cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition key is turned toLOCK, or if the key is removed from theswitch.

The shift lever can be moved if the igni-tion switch is in the ACC position. Thisallows the vehicle to be moved if thebattery is discharged.1. Keep the brake pedal depressed and

shift into a driving gear.2. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal, then gradually start the vehicle inmotion.

Shifting

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicleis parked or when starting the engine. Al-ways be sure the vehicle is at a completestop. For maximum safety, depress thebrake pedal, pull the lever toward you, andmove the lever to the P (Park) position.Apply the parking brake. When parking on ahill, apply the parking brake first, then shiftthe lever into the P (Park) position.

Shifting from P (Park)If the ignition switch is in the ON positionand the foot brake pedal is depressed, butthe shift lever still cannot be moved out of P(Park), follow these instructions:

1. Shut the engine off and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clock-wise to the first position (ACC).

4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gear-shift lever to N (Neutral).

5. Start the engine.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be surethe vehicle is completely stopped. Depressthe brake pedal, then pull the shift levertoward you and move it to the R (Reverse)position.

ASD0552


Z X

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicle ismoving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

2 (Second gear):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.

Do not downshift into 2 at speeds above 63MPH (100 km/h). Do not exceed 63 MPH(100 km/h) in 2.

1 (Low gear):

Use 1 when climbing steep hills slowly ordriving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking onsteep downhill grades.

Do not exceed 38 MPH (60 km/h) in 1.

Do not downshift into 1 at speeds above 38MPH (60 km/h).

Accelerator downshift--In D position--

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depressthe accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts thetransmission down into third gear, second gearor first gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the Fail-safe operation occurs, thenext time the key is turned to the ONposition, the O/D OFF light blinks for ap-proximately 8 seconds after coming on for 2seconds. While the vehicle can be drivenunder these circumstances, please notethat the transmission will remain in 3rd gear.

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the Fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occur evenif all electrical circuits are functioning properly.In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and waitfor 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to theON position. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does not re-turn to its normal operating condition, have anauthorized NISSAN dealer check the trans-mission and repair, if necessary.

Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the trans-mission is automatically ‘‘reset’’ to overdriveON.

ON: For normal driving the overdriveswitch is engaged. The transmissionis upshifted into overdrive as thevehicle speed increases.

Overdrive (4th gear) does not engageuntil the engine has reached operatingtemperature.

OFF: For driving up and down long slopes

ASD0561


Z X

where engine braking is necessary,push the overdrive switch once. TheO/D OFF indicator light illuminates atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortableshift shocks as the transmission shifts be-tween 3rd gear and overdrive repeatedly. Inthis case, press the overdrive switch.

When driving conditions change, press theoverdrive switch to turn the overdrive on.The O/D OFF indicator light goes out.

Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time with the O/D OFFlight illuminated. This reduces the fueleconomy.

WARNING● Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to doso can cause brake failure and leadto an accident.

● Do not release the parking brakefrom outside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully en-gaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the park-ing brake and cause an accident. To engage: Firmly depress the parking

brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position.

3. Press and release the parking brakecompletely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

ASD1017

PARKING BRAKE


Z X

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions,it cancels automatically. The SET indica-tor light in the instrument panel thenblinks to warn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn theCRUISE main switch OFF and have thesystem checked by an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light in the instrumentpanel may blink when the CRUISE mainswitch is turned ON while pushing either

the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or theCANCEL switch (located on the steeringwheel). To properly set the cruise controlsystem, perform the steps in the orderindicated.

WARNINGDo not use the cruise control whendriving under the following conditions:● When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.● In heavy traffic or in traffic that var-

ies in speed.● On winding or hilly roads.● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.).● In very windy areas.Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROLOPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at speedsbetween 29 and 90 MPH (47 and 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

To turn the cruise control on, push theCRUISE main switch. The indicator light onthe switch comes on.

To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourvehicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. The SETlight in the instrument cluster comes on.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-ously set speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steep hills.If this happens, drive without the cruisecontrol.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any ofthese three methods.

a) Push the CANCEL button; the SET lightin the instrument panel goes out.

b) Tap the brake pedal; the SET light goesout.

c) Push the cruise control OFF switch. Boththe main switch indicator and SET lights goout.

WSD0015

CRUISE CONTROL


Z X

● If you depress the brake pedal whilepushing the RES/ACCEL switch, theRES/ ACCEL function is cancelled.

In order for the RES/ACCEL switch tooperate, the COAST/SET must be usedto re-engage the system.

● The cruise control automatically cancelsif the vehicle slows down more than 5MPH (8 km/h) below the set speed.

● Move the selector lever to N (Neutral).The SET light goes out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, pushand release the COAST/SET switch.

b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

c) Push and release the RES/ACCELswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods.

a) Tap the brake pedal. When the vehicleattains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

c) Push and release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the RES/ACCEL switch. The ve-hicle resumes the last set cruising speedwhen the vehicle speed is over 29 MPH (47km/h).

During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km),follow these recommendations for the futurereliability and fuel economy of your newvehicle.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km).

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE


Z X

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-tain cruising speeds with a constant ac-celerator position.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the high-way. Driving at high speed lowers fueleconomy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-ing. Maintain a safe distance behindother vehicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic main-tenance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated at the correctpressure. Low tire pressure increasestire wear and wastes fuel.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment causes not only tirewear but also lower fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it ismore economical to use the air condi-tioner and leave the windows closed toreduce drag.

SD1001M

INCREASING FUELECONOMY


Z X

WARNINGDo not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

WARNING

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set andthe transmission placed into P (Park)position. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpect-edly or roll away and result in anaccident. Make sure the shift leverhas been pushed up as far as it cango and cannot be moved withoutpulling it towards you.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto the street when parked on a slopingdriveway, it is a good practice to turn thewheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s1

Turn the wheels toward the curb andmove the vehicle forward until the curbside wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: s3

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move away fromthe center of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

ASD0007

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


Z X

The power assisted steering is designed touse a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine,to aid steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you still have control of the vehicle. How-ever, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

WARNINGIf the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe much harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrau-lic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, youwill still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakeThe brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, you canstop the vehicle by depressing the brakepedal. However, greater foot pressure onthe brake pedal is required to stop thevehicle, and the stopping distance is longer.

Using the brakesAvoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This overheats the brakes,wears out the brake linings and pads fasterand reduces fuel economy.

To help save the brakes and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going downa slope or long grade. Overheated brakesmay reduce braking performance and couldresult in loss of vehicle control.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, your braking distance is longer andthe vehicle may pull to one side duringbraking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedalto heat up the brakes. Do this until thebrakes return to normal. Avoid driving thevehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

WARNING● While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-ing or downshifting. Abrupt brakingor acceleration could cause thewheels to skid and result in an acci-dent.

● If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the powerassist for the brakes will not work.Braking will be harder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS)The anti-lock brake system controls thebrakes at each wheel so the wheels do notlock when braking abruptly or when braking

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


Z X

on slippery surfaces. The system detects therotation speed at each wheel and varies thebrake fluid pressure to prevent each wheelfrom locking and sliding. By preventing wheellockup, the system helps the driver maintainsteering control and helps to minimize swerv-ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNINGDo not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stopping dis-tances.

Normal operationThe anti-lock brake system does not operateat speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h).(The speeds vary according to road condi-tions.) When the anti-lock brake systemsenses one or more wheels are close tolocking up, the actuator (under the hood)rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-sure (like pumping the brakes very quickly).While the actuator is working, you may feel apulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noiseor vibration from the actuator under the hood.This is normal and indicates the anti-lock

brake system is working properly. However,the pulsation may indicate road conditions arehazardous and extra care is required whiledriving.

Self-test featureThe anti-lock brake system consists of elec-tronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulicsolenoids controlled by a computer.

The computer has a built-in diagnosticfeature that tests the system each timeyou start the engine and move the ve-hicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsation in thebrake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of any malfunction. If the com-puter senses any malfunction, it switchesthe anti-lock brake system OFF and turnson the ABS brake warning light in the dash-board. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self-test, orwhile driving, take the vehicle to an authorizedNISSAN dealer for repair.

WARNINGThe anti-lock brake system is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces, but re-member that the stopping distance onslippery surfaces will be longer than onnormal surfaces, even with the anti-lock brake system. Stopping distancesmay also be longer on rough, gravel orsnow covered roads, or if you are usingtire chains. Always maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front of you.Ultimately, the responsibility for safetyof self and others rests in the hands ofthe driver.Tire type and condition of tires mayalso affect braking effectiveness.● When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all fourwheels.


Z X

● When installing a spare tire, makesure it is the proper size and type asspecified on the tire placard. For tireplacard location information, refer to‘‘Tire placard’’ in the “Technical andconsumer information” section ofthis manual.

● For additional information, refer to‘‘Wheels and tires’’ in the ‘‘Do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

FREEING A FROZEN DOORLOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer or glycerin through the key hole. Ifthe lock becomes frozen, heat the key be-fore inserting it in the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter, when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check the anti-freeze (ethylene glycol base)to assure proper winter protection. For de-tails, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the‘‘Do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, the bat-tery fluid may freeze and damage the bat-tery. To maintain maximum efficiency, thebattery should be checked regularly. Fordetails, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Maintenanceand do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATERIf the vehicle is to be left outside withoutanti-freeze, drain the cooling system byopening the drain valves located under the

radiator and on the engine block. Refillbefore operating the vehicle. See ‘‘Chang-ing engine coolant’’ in the ‘‘Maintenanceand do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to

provide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performance ofthese tires is substantially reduced insnowy and icy conditions. If you operateyour vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NIS-SAN recommends using MUD & SNOWor ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.Please consult your NISSAN dealer forthe tire type, size, speed rating and avail-ability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, someCanadian provinces and U.S. states pro-hibit their use. Check local, state and pro-vincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, maybe poorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used. Make sure theyare of proper size for the tires on your

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


Z X

vehicle and are installed according to thechain manufacturer’s suggestions. In ad-dition, drive at a reduced speed, other-wise, your vehicle may be damagedand/or vehicle handling and performancemay be adversely affected.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper sizefor the tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sug-gestions. Use only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ chains.Other types may damage your vehicle. Usechain tensioners when recommended bythe tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tightfit. Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibil-ity of whipping action damage to the fendersor undercarriage. If possible, avoid fullyloading your vehicle when using tire chains.In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Do notexceed the maximum speed suggested bythe tire chain manufacturer. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehiclehandling and performance may be ad-versely affected.

Never install tire chains on TEMPORARYUSE ONLY and small size spare tires. Donot use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:

1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed underthe jack to give it firm support.

3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

4. Extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slickand very hard to drive on. The ve-hicle will have much less traction or‘‘grip’’ under these conditions. Try toavoid driving on wet ice until theroad is salted or sanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive withcaution. Accelerate and slow downwith care. If accelerating or down-shifting too fast, the drive wheelswill lose even more traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pave-ment.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steer-ing maneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control onslippery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keepsnow clear of the exhaust pipe andfrom around your vehicle.


Z X

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

An engine block heater to assist extremecold temperature starting is availablethrough an authorized NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can beinjured by an electrical shock if you usean ungrounded connection.


Z X

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...................................................................6-2Changing a flat tire ............................................6-2

Jump starting..........................................................6-8Push starting ........................................................6-10If your vehicle overheats ......................................6-10After an accident ..................................................6-11

Inertia fuel shut-off switch ...............................6-11Towing your vehicle .............................................6-12

Towing recommended by Nissan....................6-13Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuckvehicle) ............................................................6-14

Z X

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow:

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the gearshift leverto the P (Park) position.

4. Turn off the engine.5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and

to signal professional road assistancepersonnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING● Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the automatictransmission is shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicleis on a slope, ice or slippery areas.This is hazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traf-fic is close to your vehicle. Wait forprofessional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite theflat tire. This prevents the vehicle from roll-ing when it is jacked up.

WARNINGBe sure to block the wheel as the ve-hicle may move and result in personalinjury.

CE1003M

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

Z X

Getting the spare tire and toolsRemove the jack jack storage bag locatedunder the third row seat.

1. Locate the cut in the carpet for the hexnut in the the cargo area. The hex nut isused to lower and raise the spare tirelocated underneath the vehicle.

2. Place the lug wrench over the hex nutand turn counterclockwise until the cableextends completely. The spare tire hexnut rachets when the cable is fully ex-tended.

3. Carefully slide the tire from under therear of the vehicle.

ACE1025

ACE1026 ACE0006

In case of emergency 6-3

Z X

4. Stand the tire up to remove the retainer. Removing wheel coverRemove the jack rod from the jack storagebag. For wheel cover removal, place thescrewdriver tip of the jack rod between thewheel cover and the edge of the rim. Pushand twist gently.

CAUTIONDo not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so couldresult in personal injury.

Removing wheel cap

For cap removal, place the screwdriver tipof the jack rod into the indentation betweenthe cap and the wheel. Push and twistgently.

ACE0014 ACE1023 ACE1022


Z X

Jacking up the vehicle and remov-ing the damaged tire

WARNING● Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by the jack.● Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicleon other vehicles. The jack is de-signed for lifting only your vehicleduring a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points.Never use any other part of the ve-hicle for jack support.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under thejack.

● Do not start or run engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may causethe vehicle to move.

● Do not allow passengers to stay inthe vehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with the wheelsoff of the ground. It may cause thevehicle to move.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turnsby turning counterclockwise with the lugwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

ACE1021 ACE1030


Z X

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated above so the top ofthe jack contacts the vehicle at thejack-up point. Align the center of both thejack head and the notch at the jack-uppoint as shown. Also fit the notchedportion of the vehicle in the groove of thejack head as shown.

The jack should be used on level, firmground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle,securely hold the jack lever and rod withboth hands as shown above. Removethe wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

ACE1031


Z X

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading ‘‘Wheels and tires’’ in the ‘‘Main-tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section ofthis manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tightenthe lug nuts finger tight.

3. With the lug wrench, tighten the lug nutsalternately and evenly until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the lugwrench, tighten the lug nuts securely inthe sequence as illustrated. Lower thevehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.)

As soon as possible, tighten the lug nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Lug nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 N zm)

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked forthree hours or more or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on thetire placard affixed to the inside of theglove box.

CE1003


Z X

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

1. To raise the tire to the stowed position,install the retainer through the wheelcenter and turn the wheel lug wrenchclockwise until the tire is raised to itsoriginal position underneath the vehicle.

The spare tire hex nut ratchets whenthe tire is raised. It won’t allow you toover-tighten.

2. Check for proper seating against under-body supports. If necessary, loosen tire,reposition and retighten.

3. Securely store the jacking equipment inthe vehicle.

WARNING● Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items canbecome dangerous projectiles in anaccident or sudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructionsunder the heading ‘‘Wheels andtires’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,the instructions and precautions below mustbe followed.

WARNING● If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It couldalso damage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames awayfrom the battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to comeinto contact with eyes, skin, clothingor painted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulfuric acid solutionwhich can cause severe burns. If thefluid should come into contact withanything, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.

● Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improper ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

WCE0005

JUMP STARTING


Z X

● Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye pro-tectors (for example, goggles or in-dustrial safety spectacles) andremove rings, metal bands, or anyother jewelry. Do not lean over whenjump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic en-gine cooling fan. It could come on atany time. Keep hands and other ob-jects away from it.

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the two vehicles to bringtheir batteries close to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the gear-shift lever to the P (Park) position. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical systems(lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequenceas illustrated.

CAUTION● Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to bodyground (for example, the strutmounting bolt, engine lift bracket,etc.) — not to the battery.

ACE1009


Z X

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that the clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other ve-hicle at about 2,000 RPM, and start theengine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTIONDo not keep the starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, turn the keyoff and wait 3 to 4 seconds beforetrying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and then thepositive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).Be sure to dispose of the cloth used tocover the vent holes as it may be con-taminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTIONAutomatic transmission models cannotbe push or tow started. This may causetransmission or other vehicle damage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated byan extremely high temperature gauge read-ing), or if you feel a lack of engine power,detect abnormal noise, etc., take the follow-ing steps:

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your ve-hicle overheats. Doing so couldcause a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of beingscalded, never remove the radiatorcap while the engine is still hot.When the radiator cap is removed,pressurized hot water will spurt out,possibly causing serious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,apply the parking brake and move thegearshift lever to the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Openall the windows, move the temperaturecontrol dial to warm and fan control dialto four.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLEOVERHEATS


Z X

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the ra-diator before opening the hood. Wait untilno steam or coolant can be seen beforeproceeding.

4. Open the hood.

WARNINGIf steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-ning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leak-ing or the cooling fan does not run, stopthe engine.

WARNINGBe careful not to allow your hands, hairor clothing to come into contact with,or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when thecoolant temperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down completely,check the coolant level in the reservoirtank with the engine running. Add coolantto the reservoir tank, if necessary. Haveyour vehicle repaired at an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

INERTIA FUEL SHUT-OFFSWITCH

When the vehicle is involved in a collision,the inertia fuel shutoff switch is designed toautomatically stop the flow of fuel to theengine. The impact forces needed to triggerthe switch do not have to be great. Parkinglot bumping or road impacts (such as drivingover potholes) may trigger the switch.

Once the inertia fuel shutoff switch is trig-gered, it must be reset before the enginecan be started. If your engine cranks butdoes not start after a collision, take the

ACE1020

AFTER AN ACCIDENT


Z X

following steps to correctly reset the switch:

1. Turn the key in the ignition to OFF.

2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push downthe red reset button on the inertia fuelshut-off switch.

4. Turn the ignition key ON for a few sec-onds, then turn it OFF.

5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If no fuel is detected,try to start your vehicle again.

WARNINGIf you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Youcould injure yourself or others. Have allthe passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-cial in Canada) and local regulations fortowing must be followed. Incorrect towingequipment could damage your vehicle.Towing instructions are available from anauthorized NISSAN dealer. Local serviceoperators are generally familiar with theapplicable laws and procedures for towing.To assure proper towing and to preventaccidental damage to your vehicle, NISSANrecommends having a service operator towyour vehicle. It is advisable to have theservice operator carefully read the followingprecautions.

WARNING● Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.● Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that thetransmission, axles, steering systemand powertrain are in working con-dition. If any unit is damaged, dolliesmust be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


Z X

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bedtruck as illustrated.

ACE1029


Z X

CAUTION● Never tow automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive dam-age to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with therear wheels raised always use tow-ing dollies under the front wheels.

● When towing with the front wheelson towing dollies:

● Turn the ignition key to the OFFposition, and secure the steer-ing wheel in a straight aheadposition with a rope or similardevice. Never secure the steer-ing wheel by turning the igni-tion key to the LOCK position.This may damage the steeringlock mechanism.

● Move the shift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing with the rear wheels onthe ground (if you do not use towingdollies): Always release the parkingbrake.

● Never use a tow bar that attaches tothe bumper when you tow your ve-hicle. It may damage the bumper andcause damage to the transmission.

● Do not tow with a sling type truck,either from the front or rear. It maycause body damage.

● Never utilize the rear tie down brack-ets or slots to tow another vehicle asthis may cause body damage.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)● Tow chains or cables must only be at-

tached to the main structual members ofthe vehicle.

● Pulling devices should be routed so theydo not touch any part of the suspension,steering, brake or cooling systems.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull

the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

WARNINGDo not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.


Z X

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ....................................................7-2Washing.............................................................7-2Waxing...............................................................7-2Removing spots.................................................7-3Underbody .........................................................7-3Glass..................................................................7-3Aluminum alloy wheels......................................7-3Chrome parts.....................................................7-3

Cleaning interior .....................................................7-3

Floor mats..........................................................7-4Seat belts ..........................................................7-4

Corrosion protection...............................................7-4Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion................................................7-4Environmental factors influence the rateof corrosion........................................................7-4To protect your vehicle from corrosion .............7-5

Z X

In order to maintain the appearance of yourvehicle, it is important to take proper care ofit.

In the following cases, please wash yourvehicle as soon as possible to protect thepaint surface:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible dam-age from acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park ina shady area or protect the vehicle with abody cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing a bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly usinga mild soap, a special vehicle soap orgeneral purpose dishwashing liquid mixedwith clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION● Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemicaldetergents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight or while the vehicle body ishot, as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so that the paint surface isnot scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty ofclean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-fore, these areas must be regularly cleaned.Take care that the drain holes in the loweredge of the door are open. Spray waterunder the body and in the wheel wells toloosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry thevehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.After waxing, polishing is recommended toremove built-up residue and to avoid a‘‘weathered’’ appearance.

An authorized NISSAN dealer can assist

AI1002M

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Z X

you in choosing the proper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the wax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

● If the surface does not polish easily, usea ‘‘road tar’’ remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finishmay dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the surface of the paint to avoid lastingdamage or staining. Special cleaning prod-ucts are available at an authorized NISSANdealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter,the underbody must be cleaned regularly.This prevents dirt and salt from building upand causing the acceleration of underbodyand suspension corrosion.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-mal for glass to become coated with a filmafter the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.Glass cleaner and a soft cloth easily removethis film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,abrasive cleaners or chlorine-baseddisinfectant cleaners. They could dam-age the electrical conductors, radio an-tenna elements or rear window defog-ger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash regularly, especially during wintermonths in areas where road salt is used.Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintain thefinish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe thevinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, softcloth dampened in mild soap solution, thenwipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Beforeusing any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabricprotectors contain chemicals that may stainor bleach the seat material. Use a clothdampened only with water, to clean themeter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner, or anysimilar material.

● Leather seats should be regularlycoated with a leather wax like saddlesoap. Never use car wax.

● Never use fabric protectors unlessrecommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaneron meter or gauge lens covers. Itmay damage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3

Z X

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Nomatter what mats are used, be sure theyare fitted for your vehicle and are prop-erly positioned in the footwell to preventinterference with pedal operation. Matsshould be maintained with regular cleaningand replaced if they become excessivelyworn.

Front floor mat positioning aid(Driver side only)This model includes a front floor matbracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid.NISSAN floor mats, specially designed foryour vehicle, incorporate grommets. To in-stall, simply position the mat using the floormat bracket hook through the floor matgrommet hole while centering the mat in thefootwell.

Periodically check to make certain the matis properly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely before using them.

WARNINGDo not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye,or chemical solvents to clean the seatbelts, since these may severely weakenthe seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

1. The accumulation of moisture-retainingdirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN-FLUENCE THE RATE OF COR-ROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on thevehicle body underside can accelerate cor-rosion. Wet floor coverings do not dry com-pletely inside the vehicle, and should beremoved for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated:

● in areas of high relative humidity.

CORROSION PROTECTION


Z X

● in areas where the temperatures stayabove freezing.

● where atmospheric pollution exists.

● where road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase accelerates the rateof corrosion to those parts which are notwell ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt inthe air in coastal areas, or heavy road saltuse accelerates the corrosion process.Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-tion of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION● wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean.

● always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as possible.

● keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumulation.

● check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CAUTION● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-ment by washing it out with a hose.Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaneror broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic com-ponents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor panand fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult an authorized NISSANdealer.

Appearance and care 7-5

Z X

MEMO


Z X

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements.....................................8-2General maintenance.............................................8-3

Explanation of general maintenanceitems ..................................................................8-3

Maintenance precautions .......................................8-5Engine compartment check locations ....................8-7Engine cooling system ...........................................8-8

Checking engine coolant level ..........................8-8Changing engine coolant ..................................8-9

Engine oil ...............................................................8-9Checking engine oil level ..................................8-9Changing engine oil ........................................8-10Changing engine oil filter.................................8-11

Automatic transmission fluid ................................8-12Temperature conditions for checking..............8-12

Power steering fluid..............................................8-13Brake fluid ............................................................8-13Window washer fluid ............................................8-14Battery ..................................................................8-14

Jump starting...................................................8-15Drive belts ............................................................8-16Spark plugs ..........................................................8-16

Replacing spark plugs.....................................8-16Air cleaner ............................................................8-17Windshield wiper blades ......................................8-19

Cleaning ..........................................................8-19Replacing.........................................................8-19

Parking brake and brake pedal............................8-21Checking parking brake...................................8-21Checking brake pedal .....................................8-21Brake booster ..................................................8-22

Fuses....................................................................8-22Engine compartment .......................................8-22Passenger compartment .................................8-23

Keyfob battery replacement .................................8-24Lights ....................................................................8-25

Headlights........................................................8-25Fog lights .........................................................8-26Exterior and interior lights ...............................8-27

Wheels and tires ..................................................8-31Tire pressure ...................................................8-31Types of tires...................................................8-32Tire chains.......................................................8-33Changing tires and wheels..............................8-33

Z X

Your new NISSAN has been designed tohave minimum maintenance requirementswith longer service intervals to save youboth time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essentialto maintain your NISSAN’s good mechani-cal condition, as well as its emission andengine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethe scheduled maintenance, as well as gen-eral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receivesproper maintenance. You are a vital link inthe maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required andoptional scheduled maintenance items aredescribed and listed in your ‘‘Nissan Serviceand Maintenance Guide.’’ You must refer tothat guide to ensure that necessary mainte-nance is performed on your Nissan at regu-lar intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation of the vehicle. Theyare essential if your vehicle is to continue tooperate properly. It is your responsibility toperform these maintenance proceduresregularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-quire minimal mechanical skill and only afew general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be doneby yourself, a qualified technician or, if youprefer, an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and tuned by an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-cialists who are kept up-to-date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in-dealershiptraining programs. They are completelyqualified to work on NISSAN vehicles be-fore they begin work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that an authorizedNISSAN dealer’s service department per-

forms the best job to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle — in a reliableand economic way.

MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z X

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance should beperformed regularly as prescribed in thissection. If you detect any unusual sounds,vibrations or smells, be sure to check for thecause or have an authorized NISSANdealer do it promptly. In addition, you shouldnotify an authorized NISSAN dealer if youthink repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the ‘‘Mainte-nance precautions’’ later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with an ‘‘*’’ can be found later inthis section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge atleast once a month and always prior to longdistance trips, including the spare, and ad-just to the specified pressure if necessary.

Check carefully for damage, cuts or exces-sive wear.

Wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, andcheck for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Wheel alignment and balance If the ve-hicle should pull to either side while drivingon a straight and level road, or if you detectuneven or abnormal tire wear, there may bea need for a wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancingmay be needed.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to ‘‘Important Tire Safety Informa-tion’’ in the Warranty Information Booklet(US) or ‘‘Tire Safety Information’’ in theWarranty and Roadside Assistance Infor-mation booklet (Canada).

Windshield Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield at leastevery six months for cracks or other dam-age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Doors and hood Check that all doors andthe hood operate properly. Also ensure thatall latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, rollers and links if necessary. Makesure the secondary latch keeps the hoodfrom opening when the primary latch isreleased.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubricationfrequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure the headlights, stop lights,tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all operating properly and installed se-curely. Also check headlight aim.

Inside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing periodic maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an ‘‘*’’ is found later in thissection.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Z X

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly andthat the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in sufficient quantity when operating theheater or air conditioner.

Steering wheel Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessive free-play, hard steering or strange noises.

Seats Check seat position controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. toensure they operate smoothly and alllatches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints move up anddown smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched posi-tions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjust-ers and retractors) operate properly andsmoothly, and are installed securely. Checkthe belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear ordamage.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort.Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal oper-ates smoothly and check that is has theproper free travel.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedalfor smooth operation and make sure it hasthe proper distance under it when de-pressed fully. Check the brake booster func-tion. Be certain to keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Parking brake* Check that the lever hasthe proper travel and confirm that yourvehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hillwith only the parking brake applied.

Automatic transmission P (Park) posi-tion mechanism Check that the lock re-lease button on the selector lever operatesproperly and smoothly. On a fairly steep hillcheck that your vehicle is held securely withthe selector lever in the P position withoutapplying any brakes.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (e.g., each time youtime you check the engine oil or refuel.

Additional information on the followingitems with an ‘‘*’’ is found later in thissection.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that thereis adequate fluid in the reservoir.

Engine oil level* Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level surface withthe engine off. Wait a few minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.

Brake and clutch fluid level* Make surethat the brake and clutch fluid level is be-tween the MIN and MAX lines on the reser-voir.

Power steering fluid level* and linesCheck the level when the fluid is cold, withthe engine off. Check the lines for properattachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Automatic transmission fluid level*Check the level after putting the selectorlever in P with the engine idling at operatingtemperature.


Z X

Engine coolant level* Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, de-formation, rot, or loose connections.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drivebelts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines.Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

Exhaust system Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks, or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-ately have the exhaust system inspected byan authorized NISSAN dealer. See the car-bon monoxide warning in the ‘‘Starting anddriving’’ section of this manual.

Underbody The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to control dust. Itis very important to remove these sub-stances from the underbody, otherwise rust

may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel linesand exhaust system. At the end of winter,the underbody should be thoroughly flushedwith plain water, in those areas where mudand dirt may have accumulated. See the‘‘Appearance and care’’ section of thismanual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after thevehicle has been parked for a while. Waterdripping from the air conditioner after use isnormal. If you should notice any leaks or ifgasoline fumes are evident, check for thecause and have it corrected immediately.

When performing any inspection or mainte-nance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injury toyourself or damage to the vehicle. Thefollowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING● Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the ve-hicle from moving. Move the gear-shift lever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFFor Lock position when performingany parts replacement or repairs.

● Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic engine cooling fan. It maycome on at any time without warn-ing, even if the ignition key is in theOFF position and the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, always dis-connect the negative battery cablebefore working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

MAINTENANCEPRECAUTIONS


Z X

● It is advisable to secure or removeany loose clothing and remove anyjewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.before working on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection when-ever you work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in anenclosed space such as a garage, besure there is proper ventilation forexhaust gases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while itis supported only by a jack. If it isnecessary to work under the vehicle,support it with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by an authorized NISSANdealer because the fuel lines areunder high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood whilethe engine is hot. Turn off the engineand wait until it cools down.

● Never connect or disconnect the bat-tery or any transistorized compo-nent while the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

● Avoid contact with used engine oiland coolant. Improperly disposedengine oil, engine coolant, and/orother vehicle fluids can damage theenvironment. Always conform to lo-cal regulations for disposal of ve-hicle fluid.

This ‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ sec-tion gives instructions regarding only thoseitems which are relatively easy for an ownerto perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is alsoavailable. See ‘‘Owner’s manual/Servicemanual order information’’ in the ‘‘Technicaland consumer information’’ section.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect your warranty coverage. If indoubt about any servicing, have it doneby an authorized NISSAN dealer.


Z X

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner housing

5. Battery

6. Fuse and relay box

7. Radiator cap

8. Fuse and relay box

9. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

10. Engine oil filler cap

11. Spark plug wires

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

13. Engine coolant reservoir

WDI0104

ENGINE COMPARTMENTCHECK LOCATIONS


Z X

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze so-lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors,therefore additional engine cooling systemadditives are not necessary.

CAUTIONWhen adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only a Genuine Nissananti-freeze coolant (green) or equiva-lent with the proper mixture ratio of50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralizedor distilled water. The use of othertypes of coolant solutions or coolantcolors, such as orange, may damagethe engine cooling system.

Outside tempera-ture down to

GenuineNISSAN

Anti-freezeCoolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or Dis-tilled water

°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

WARNING● Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burnscould be caused by high pressurefluid escaping from the radiator.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure cap. To prevent engine damage,use only a genuine NISSAN radiatorcap.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir tankwhen the engine is cold. If the coolant levelis below MIN, add coolant up to the MAXlevel. If the reservoir tank is empty, checkthe coolant level in the radiator when theengine is cold. If there is insufficient cool-ant in the radiator, fill the radiator withcoolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level.

ADI1083

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


Z X

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTAn authorized NISSAN dealer can changethe engine coolant. The service procedureis found in NISSAN’s service manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engineoverheating.

WARNING● To avoid danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when theengine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. Serious burnscould be caused by high pressurefluid escaping from the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made,wash thoroughly with soap or handcleaner as soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of reach of childrenand pets.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off. Wait a few minutesfor the oil to drain back into the oilpan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check theoil level. It should be between the H(High) and L (Low) marks. If the oil levelis below the L (Low) mark, remove the oilfiller cap and pour recommended oilthrough the opening. Do not overfill.

6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the sever-ity of operating conditions.

ADI1084 ADI0009

ENGINE OIL


Z X

CAUTIONOil level should be checked regularly.Operating with an insufficient amountof oil can damage the engine, and suchdamage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and


2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature, then turnit off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drainplug.

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench andcompletely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, removeand replace it at this time. See ‘‘Chang-ing engine oil filter’’ later in this section.

WARNING● Be careful not to burn yourself. The

engine oil may be hot.● Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin can-cer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made,wash thoroughly with soap or handcleaner as soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and re-install the drain plug and anew washer. Securely tighten the drainplug with a wrench.

ADI0057


Z X

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 N zm)

Do not use excessive force.

7. Refill the engine with a recommended oilthrough the oil filler opening then installthe oil filler cap securely.See the ‘‘Technical and consumer infor-mation’’ section for drain and refill capac-ity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Alwaysuse the dipstick to determine when theproper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakagearound the drain plug. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait severalminutes. Check the oil level with thedipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and


2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oilfilter.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench. Then, remove the oil filter byturning it by hand.

CAUTIONBe careful not to burn yourself. Theengine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-face with a clean rag. Be sure to removeany old gasket material remaining on themounting surface of the engine.

6. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filterwith clean engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter in until a slightresistance is felt, then tighten an addi-tional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait severalminutes. Check the oil level. Add engineoil if necessary.

ADI0010


Z X

WARNING

● When the engine is running, keephands, jewelry and clothing awayfrom any moving parts such as thecooling fan and drive belts.

● Automatic transmission fluid is poi-sonous and should be stored care-fully in marked containers out of thereach of children.

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONSFOR CHECKING● Check the fluid level using the HOT

range on the dipstick after the followingconditions have been met:

— The engine is warmed up to operatingtemperature.

— The vehicle is driven at least 15 minutes.

— The automatic transmission fluid iswarmed to between 150°F and 170°F(66°C and 77°C).

● The fluid can be checked at fluid tem-peratures of 70°F to 95°F (21°C to 35°C)using the COLD range on the dipstickafter the engine is warmed up and beforedriving. However, the fluid should bere-checked using the HOT range.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andset the parking brake.

2. Start the engine, then move the shiftselector lever through the range of gears,ending in P (Park).

3. Check the fluid level with the engineidling.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it cleanwith a lint-free cloth.

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipsticktube as far as it goes.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the read-ing. If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add fluid through the dipstick tube.

ADI1085 WDI0004

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID


Z X

CAUTIONDO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY NissanMatic ‘D’ (Continental U.S. and Alaska)or Canada NISSAN Automatic Trans-mission Fluid. Dexron TM III/Mercon TM

or equivalent may also be used. Out-side the continental United States andAlaska contact a Nissan dealership formore information regarding suitablefluids, including recommendedbrand(s) of Dexron TM III/Mercon TM.

NOTE:

If the vehicle has been driven for a longtime at high speeds, or in city traffic inhot weather, or if it is being used to pulla trailer, the accurate fluid level cannotbe read. You should wait until the fluidhas cooled down (about 30 minutes).

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked by lookingat the MAX and MIN lines at fluid tempera-tures of 32°F to 86°F (0°C to 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add auto-matic transmission fluid type F up to theMAX line.

CAUTION● DO NOT OVERFILL.● The recommended fluid is type F

automatic transmission fluid orequivalent.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add DOT 3 fluid upto the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be thoroughlychecked by an authorized NISSAN dealer.For further brake fluid specification informa-tion, refer to the ‘‘Technical and ConsumerInformation’’ section in this manual.

ADI1086 ADI1087

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID


Z X

WARNINGUse only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior, or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damagethe brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

CAUTIONDo not spill the fluid on painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. Iffluid is spilled, wash with water.

To check the fluid level, look down the fill tubeof the washer fluid reservoir in the enginecompartment. Add fluid when the low washerfluid warning light (Canada only) comes on.

To add fluid, remove the reservoir cap andrefill the reservoir.

This reservoir serves both the front and rearwasher systems.

CAUTIONDo not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Any corrosion should be washed off witha solution of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 daysor longer, disconnect the negative (−)battery terminal cable to prevent dis-charging.

WARNING● Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gasgenerated by the battery is explo-sive. Do not allow battery fluid tocontact your skin, eyes, fabrics, orpainted surfaces. After touching abattery or battery cap, do not touchor rub your eyes. Thoroughly washyour hands. If the acid contacts youreyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 min-utes and seek medical attention

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluidin the battery is low. Low batteryfluid can cause a higher load on thebattery which can generate heat, re-

ADI1088

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY


Z X

duce battery life, and in some caseslead to an explosion.

● When working on or near the battery,always wear suitable eye protectionand remove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after han-dling.

● Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It shouldbe between the MAX and MIN lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add onlydistilled water to bring the level to the indi-cator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs using a suitabletool.

2. Add distilled water up to the MAX level.

3. Tighten cell plugs.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see the ‘‘Incase of emergency’’ section. If the enginedoes not start by jump starting, the batterymay have to be replaced. Contact an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

WDI0022


Z X

WARNINGBe sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness.If the belt is loose or in poor condition,have it replaced or adjusted by an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for con-dition and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the‘‘NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.’’

REPLACING SPARK PLUGSWARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switchare off and that the parking brake isengaged securely.

CAUTIONBe sure to use the correct socket toremove the spark plugs. An incorrectsocket can damage the spark plugs.

ADI0060 ADI0061

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS


Z X

Platinum-tipped spark plugsIt is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conven-tional type spark plugs because they lastmuch longer. Follow the maintenanceschedule, but do not reuse the spark plugsby cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

1. Disconnect the spark plug cables fromthe spark plugs.

When disconnecting, always hold the boots,not the cables.

2. Remove the spark plugs with a sparkplug socket. The plug socket has a rub-ber seal that holds the spark plug so itdoes not fall when it is pulled out. Makesure each spark plug is snugly fitted intothe plug socket.

3. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into thespark plug socket and install them. Useonly the specified spark plugs. Turneach plug several full turns by hand, thentighten with the spark plug socket to thecorrect torque. Do not overtighten.

Spark plug tightening torque:14 to 22 ft-lb (20 to 29 N zm)

4. Holding the boot, re-connect each hightension cable to its proper spark plug bypushing it on until you feel a snap.

The filter should not be cleaned and reused.Replace it according to the maintenanceintervals shown in the ‘‘NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide.’’ When replacingthe filter, unclip the four clamps and removethe filter. Wipe the inside of the air cleanerhousing and the cover with a damp clothwhen replacing filter.

ADI1100 ADI0579

AIR CLEANER


Z X

WARNING● Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops flameif the engine backfires. If it isn’t thereand the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with the aircleaner removed, and be carefulwhen working on the engine with theair cleaner removed.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine withthe air cleaner removed. Doing socould result in serious injury.


Z X

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if the wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other mate-rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild deter-gent. Then, rinse the blade with clear water.If your windshield is still not clear after

cleaning the blades and using the wipers,replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

REPLACINGReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the tab, then move the wiper bladedown the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged whenthe engine hood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contactthe glass; otherwise the arms may bedamaged from wind pressure.

ADI1022

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


Z X

Rear window wiper blade1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push the tab, then move the wiper bladedown the wiper arm to remove.

3. Insert a new wiper blade onto the wiperarm and press down until the blade clicksinto place.

ADI1114


Z X

CHECKING PARKING BRAKEFrom the released position, push the park-ing brake foot lever down. If the number ofclicks is out of the range listed above, seean authorized NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distancebetween the upper surface of the pedal andthe floor. If it is out of the range shownabove, see an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front disc-type brakes self-adjust everytime the brake pedal is applied. The reardrum-type brakes also self-adjust everytime the brake pedal is applied. If the brake

pedal goes down farther than normal, seean authorized NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

See an authorized NISSAN dealer for abrake system check if the brake pedalheight does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requiresreplacement, it makes a high pitched scrap-ing or screeching sound when the vehicle isin motion whether or not the brake pedal isdepressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicator soundis heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops is nor-mal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

The rear drum brakes do not have audiblewear indicators. If you ever hear an unusu-ally loud noise from the rear drum brakes,have them inspected as soon as possible by

ADI1089 ADI0027

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKEPEDAL


Z X

an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regard-ing brake inspections, see the appropriatemaintenance schedule information in the‘‘NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.’’

BRAKE BOOSTERCheck the brake booster function as fol-lows:

1. With the engine off, press and releasethe brake pedal several times. Whenbrake pedal movement (distance oftravel) remains the same from one pedalapplication to the next, continue on to thenext step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, startthe engine. The pedal height should dropa little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, turn theengine off. Keep the pedal depressed forabout 30 seconds; the pedal heightshould not change.

4. Run the engine for one minute withoutdepressing the brake pedal, then turn itoff. Depress the brake pedal severaltimes. The pedal travel distance will de-

crease gradually with each depressionas the vacuum is released from thebooster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, see anauthorized NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENTCAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher amperagerating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

If a headlight does not come on, check foran open fuse:

The left headlight (driver’s side) and rightheadlight (passenger side) fuses are lo-cated in the left-hand fuse box, near theradiator cap.

ADI1090

FUSES


Z X

1. Turn the headlight switch to the OFFposition.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse pullerattached to the passenger compartmentfuse box cover.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

6. If a new fuse opens again, have theelectrical system checked and repairedby an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operateand fuses are in good condition, check thefusible links. If any of these fusible links aremelted, replace only with genuine NISSANparts.

If the new fusible link melts again, have thesystem checked and repaired by an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTIONNever use a fuse of a higher amperagerating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the elec-trical system or cause a fire.

If the electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse:

1. Remove the key from the ignition.

2. Open the fuse box cover. Refer to thefuse label on the fuse box cover to locatethe fuse in question.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

5. If a new fuse opens again, have theelectrical system checked and repairedby an authorized NISSAN dealer.

WDI0023


Z X

Replace the battery as follows:1. Open the lid using a coin.2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Insert the batteries as illustrated above.Recommended battery: PanasonicCR2025, 3V or equivalent.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Press the button, then the buttontwo or three times to check the keyfoboperation.

If the batteries are removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4.● An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always conformto local regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 30 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

APD1087

KEYFOB BATTERYREPLACEMENT


Z X

HEADLIGHTSThe headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halo-gen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced frominside the engine compartment without re-moving the headlight assembly.

CAUTION● High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do nottouch the glass envelope.

Removing the headlight bulb1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector fromthe rear end of the bulb.

3. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-wise until it is free from the headlightreflector, then remove it.

4. Remove the headlight bulb by pulling itstraight out. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it.

Replacing the headlight bulb1. Insert the bulb into the headlight reflector

with the flat side of the plastic base facingupward.

2. Install the bulb retaining ring and turn itclockwise until it stops.

3. Push the electrical connector into thebulb plastic base until it snaps and stops.

CAUTIONDO NOT TOUCH THE BULB.● Use the same number and wattage

as originally installed:Wattage 65/55Bulb no. 9007 (HB5)

● Aiming is not necessary after replac-ing the bulb. When aiming adjust-ment is necessary, contact anauthorized NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the bulb out of theheadlight reflector for a long periodof time as dust, moisture and smokemay enter the headlight body andaffect the performance of the head-light.

AEL076-A

LIGHTS


Z X

FOG LIGHTS

Replacing the fog light bulb

1. Remove the three splash shield screwsand three push pins.

2. Move the splash shield out of the way.

3. Disconnect electrical connector.

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise until itis free from the fog light housing.

LDI0064

LDI0065


Z X

EXTERIOR AND INTERIORLIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly

High/Low 65/55 9007 (HB5)

Front turn signal light 8.25/27 3157A

Front fog light 27 881L

Front combination light:

Front side marker light 3.8 194

Parking/Cornering 8.25/27 3157

Rear combination light:

Turn signal 27 3156A

Stop/Tail 8.25/27 3157

Rear side marker light 5 168

Back-up light 27 3156

License plate light 3.8 194

High-mounted stop light 12.8 912

Interior lights 12 211-2

Personal reading light 10 578

Luggage compartment light 12 211-2

Steplight 12 211-2

Spotlight 10 578


Z X

Replacement proceduresAll lights (except for headlights) are eithertype A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb,first remove the lens and/or cover.

WDI0059

ADI1093


Z X

WDI0062


Z X

ADI1096


Z X

TIRE PRESSURE

If you have a flat tire, see the ‘‘In case ofemergency’’ section of this manual.

Maximum inflation pressureDo not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sure shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressure (including thespare) at least once a month and alwaysprior to long distance trips. Incorrect tirepressure may adversely affect tire life andvehicle handling. Tire pressure should be

ADI1095

DI1033M

WHEELS AND TIRES


Z X

checked when tires are COLD. Tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for three or more hours, ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tirepressures are shown on the tire placardaffixed to the inside of the glove box.

WARNING● Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-

denly and cause an accident.

● The vehicle capacity weight is indi-cated on the tire placard. Do not loadyour vehicle beyond this capacity.Overloading your vehicle may resultin reduced tire life, unsafe operatingconditions due to premature tire fail-ure, or unfavorable handling charac-teristics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyondthe specified capacity may also re-sult in failure of other vehicle com-ponents.

● Before taking a long trip, or wheneveryou have loaded your vehicle heavily,use a tire pressure gauge to ensurethat the tire pressures are at thespecified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equippedwith high speed rated tires. Drivingfaster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to ‘‘Important Tire SafetyInformation’’ in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet (US) or ‘‘Tire SafetyInformation’’ in the Warranty andRoadside Assistance Informationbooklet (Canada).

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNINGWhen changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., summer, all season or snow) andconstruction. An authorized NISSANdealer may be able to help you withinformation about tire type, size, speedrating and availability. Replacementtires may have a lower speed ratingthan the factory equipped tires, and

may not match the potential maximumvehicle speed. Never exceed the maxi-mum speed rating of the tire.


All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires to pro-vide good performance all year, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All SeasonTires are identified by ‘‘ALL SEASON’’and/or ‘‘M&S’’ on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction than AllSeason tires and may be more appropriatein some areas.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load ratingto the original equipment tires. If you do not,it can adversely affect the safety and han-dling of your vehicle.


Z X

Generally, snow tires have lower speedratings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofsnow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires. Skid andtraction capabilities of studded snow tireson wet or dry surfaces may be poorer thanthat of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper sizefor the tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sug-gestions. Use only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ chains.Other types may damage your vehicle. Usechain tensioners when recommended bythe tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight

fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibil-ity of whipping action damage to the fendersor undercarriage. If possible, avoid fullyloading your vehicle when using tire chains.In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Do notexceed maximum speed suggested by thechain manufacturer. Otherwise, your ve-hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle han-dling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Never install tire chains on TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tires. Do not use tirechains on dry roads.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

CHANGING TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire rotationTires should be rotated every 7,500 miles(12,000 km).

Tighten wheel nuts to 80 ft-lb (108 Nzm).

See ‘‘Flat tire’’ in the ‘‘In case of emergency’’section for tire replacing procedures.

ADI0656


Z X

WARNING● After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.● Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire in thetire rotation.


Tire wear and damage

WARNING● Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulging,or objects caught in the tread. Ifexcessive wear, cracks, bulging, ordeep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have a built-intread wear indicator. When the wearindicator is visible, the tire(s) shouldbe replaced.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact an authorizedNISSAN dealer.


Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,tread design, speed rating and load carryingcapacity as originally equipped. Recom-mended types and sizes are shown in‘‘Wheels and tires’’ in the ‘‘Technical andconsumer information’’ section of this manual.

WARNING● The use of tires other than those

recommended, or the mixed use oftires of different brands, construc-tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), ortread patterns can adversely affectthe ride, braking, handling, ground

DI1035M


Z X

clearance, body-to-tire clearance,snow chain clearance, speedometercalibration, headlight aim andbumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents andcould result in serious personal in-jury.

● If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimen-sion. Wheels of a different offsetcould cause premature tire wear, de-grading vehicle handling character-istics and/or interference with thebrake discs/drums. Such interfer-ence can lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheel/tire size”in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual forwheel off-set dimensions.

● Do not install a deformed wheel ortire even if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warn-ing.

● The use of retread tires is not recom-mended.


Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performedwith the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balanc-ing the front wheels on the vehicle couldlead to transmission damage.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to ‘‘Important Tire Safety Informa-tion’’ in the Warranty Information Booklet(US) or ‘‘Tire Safety Information’’ in theWarranty and Roadside Assistance Infor-mation booklet (Canada).

Care of wheels● Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the underside ofthe vehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause lossof pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire)US only. Canadian vehicles are equippedwith a full size spare tire. Observe thefollowing precautions if the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire must be used, other-wise your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident.


Z X

WARNING● The spare tire should be used only

for emergency use only. It should bereplaced by the standard tire at thefirst opportunity to avoid possibletire or diffential damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-stalled. Avoid sharp turns and abruptbraking while driving.

● Periodically check spare tire infla-tion pressure. Always keep the pres-sure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire at 60 psi (420 kP, 4.2 bar).Always keep the pressure of the fullsize spare tire (if so equipped) at therecommended pressure for standardtires, as indicated on the tire placard.For tire placard location, see ‘‘Tireplacard’’ in the index of this manual.

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire installed do not drive thevehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used onthe rear wheel and the original tireused on the front wheels (drivewheels). Use tire chains only on thefront (original) tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a fasterrate than the standard tire. Replacethe spare tire as soon as the treadwear indicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tireat the same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire isinstalled.

CAUTION● Do not use tire chains on the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tirechains will not fit properly and maycause damage to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire is smaller than theoriginal tire, ground clearance is re-duced. To avoid damage to the ve-hicle, do not drive over obstacles.Also, do not drive the vehiclethrough an automatic car wash sinceit may get caught.


Z X

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants........9-2Fuel recommendation........................................9-2Engine oil and oil filter recommendation...........9-4Recommended SAE viscosity number..............9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations ...............................9-6

Specifications .........................................................9-7Engine ...............................................................9-7Wheels and tires................................................9-9Dimensions and weights ...................................9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country ....................................................9-10Vehicle identification ............................................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate.................................................................9-10Vehicle identification number(chassis number) .............................................9-10Engine serial number ......................................9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...........................9-11Emission control information label ..................9-11

Tire placard......................................................9-12Air conditioner specification label....................9-12

Installing front license plate..................................9-12Vehicle loading information..................................9-13

Terms...............................................................9-13Determining vehicle load capacity...................9-13Loading tips .....................................................9-13

Towing a trailer.....................................................9-14Maximum load limts.........................................9-14Towing safety ..................................................9-15

Uniform tire quality grading..................................9-19Emission control system warranty .......................9-20Reporting safety defects (US only) ......................9-20Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) .......................................................9-21Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation............................................................9-22

In the event of a collision ................................9-23

Z X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a littledifferent. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the ‘‘Do-it-yourself’’section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)Recommended Fluids & LubricantsUS

measureImp

measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8gal 75.7 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

at least 87 AKI (RON 91)(1)Engine oil (7)

Drain and refillWith oil filter change 4 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.8 ● API Certification Mark (2) (3)

● API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II orAPI grade SJ, Energy Conserving (2) (3)

● ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II (2) (3)Without oil filter change 3-7/8 qt 3-1/8 qt 3.6

Cooling systemWith reservoir tank 11-1/4 qt 9-3/8 qt 10.6 50% Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant

or equivalent50% Demineralized water or Distilled waterReservoir 1-1/8 qt 1 qt 1.1

Automatic transaxle fluid 10 qt 8-1/4 qt 9.4NISSAN matic ‘D’ (Continental U.S. andAlaska) or Canada NISSAN AutomaticTransmission Fluid.(4)

Power steering fluid Refill to the proper oil levelaccording to the instructionsin the ‘‘Do-it-yourself’’ section.

Type F automatic transmission fluid orequivalent

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid(5) or equivalentDOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)Air conditioning system refrig-erant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)(6)

(1): For further details, see ‘‘Fuel recommendation’’.(2): For further detail, see ‘‘Engine oil and oil filter recomendations.’’(3): For further details, see ‘‘Recommended SAE engine oil viscosity’’.(4): DexronT III/MerconT or equivalent may also be used. Outside the Continental United States and Alaska contact

a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) ofDexronT III/MerconT Automatic Transmission Fluid.

(5): Available in mainland U.S.A. through an authorized NISSAN dealer.(6): For further details, see ‘‘Air conditioner specification label’’.(7): For further details, see ‘‘Changing engine oil.’’

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONYour vehicle is designed to operate onunleaded gasoline with an octane ratingof at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION● Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectwarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used since thiswill damage the three way catalyst.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing re-formulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emis-sions. NISSAN supports efforts towardscleaner air and suggests that you use refor-mulated gasoline when available.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Z X

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containingoxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE andmethanol with or without advertising theirpresence. NISSAN does not recommendthe use of fuels of which the oxygenatecontent and the fuel compatibility for yourvehicle cannot be readily determined. If indoubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, pleasetake the following precautions as the usageof such fuels may cause vehicle perfor-mance problems and/or fuel system dam-age.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it shouldcontain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system dam-age and/or vehicle performance prob-lems. At this time, sufficient data isnot available to ensure that all metha-nol blends are suitable for use inNISSAN vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problemssuch as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after usingoxygenate-blend fuels, immediately changeto a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a lowblend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline duringrefueling. Gasoline containing oxygen-ates can cause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use ofany fuel additives (i.e.: fuel injector cleaner,octane booster, intake valve deposit remov-ers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum,varnish or deposit removal may containactive solvents or similar ingredients that

can be harmful to the fuel system andengine.

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you shoulduse unleaded gasoline with an octane ratingof at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber. However, you may use unleaded gaso-line with an octane rating as low as 85 AKI(Anti-Knock Index) in high altitude areas(over 4,000 ft [1,219 m]) such as: Colorado,Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming,northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho,western South Dakota, western Nebraska,and the part of Texas which is directly southof New Mexico.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than stated above can causepersistent, heavy ‘‘spark knock.’’ (‘‘Sparkknock’’ is a metallic rapping noise.) Ifsevere, this can lead to engine damage. Ifyou detect a persistent heavy sparkknock even when using gasoline of thestated octane rating, or if you hear steadyspark knock while holding a steadyspeed on level roads, have an authorizedNISSAN dealer correct the condition.Failure to correct the condition is misuse

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Z X

of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is notresponsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run, and/or overheating, whichmay cause excessive fuel consumption orengine damage. If any of the above symp-toms are encountered, have your vehiclechecked at an authorized NISSAN dealer orother competent service facility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This isno cause for concern, because you getthe greatest fuel benefit when there islight spark knock for a short time underheavy engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose engine oil with thecorrect quality and viscosity to ensure sat-isfactory engine life and performance.NISSAN recommends the use of a lowfriction oil (energy conserving oil) in order toimprove fuel economy and conserve en-ergy. Oils which do not have the specifiedquality label should not be used as theycould cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) CERTIFICATIONMARK on the front of the container shouldbe used. This type of oil supersedes theexisting API SG, SH, or SJ and EnergyConserving II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the APICERTIFICATION MARK, use an API gradeSG/SH, Energy Conserving II or API gradeSJ, Energy Conserving oil. An oil with asingle designation SG or SH, or in combi-nation with other categories (for example,SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if one

ATI0507


Z X

with the API CERTIFICATION MARK can-not be found. An ILSAC grade, GF-I andGF-II oil can also be used.

Mineral based or synthetic type oils may beused in your NISSAN vehicle. These oilsmust, however, meet the API quality andSAE viscosity ratings specified for your ve-hicle. Do not mix mineral based and syn-thetic type oils in the engine.

Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or hasbeen previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because of this,it is important to select the engine oil viscos-ity based on the temperatures at which thevehicle will be operated before the next oilchange. The chart ‘‘Recommended SAEviscosity number’’ shows the recommendedoil viscosities for the expected ambient tem-peratures. Choosing an oil viscosity other

than that recommended could cause seri-ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped witha high- quality genuine NISSAN oil filter.When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oilfilter or its equivalent for the reason de-scribed in ‘‘Change intervals’’.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Oil and filter otherthan the specified quality, or oil and filterchange intervals longer than recommendedcould reduce engine life. Damage to theengine caused by improper maintenance oruse of incorrect oil and filter quality and/orviscosity is not covered by the new NISSANvehicle warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recom-mended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how you useyour vehicle. Operation under the followingconditions may require more frequent oiland filter changes:

— repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures,

— driving in dusty conditions,

— extensive idling,

— towing a trailer.


Z X

RECOMMENDED SAEVISCOSITY NUMBER

● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferredfor all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if

the ambient temperature is above 0°F(-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in thisNISSAN vehicle must be charged withthe refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) andthe lubricant, NISSAN type ‘‘PAG F’’ orthe exact equivalents.

CAUTION

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricantwill cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and will requirethe replacement of all air conditionersystem components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerant doesnot affect the earth’s atmosphere, certaingovernment regulations require the recov-ery and recycling of any refrigerant duringautomative air conditioning system service.An authorized NISSAN dealer has thetrained technicians and equipment needed

to recover and recycle your air conditioningsystem refrigerant.

Contact an authorized NISSAN dealer whenservicing your air conditioning system.

TI1028


Z X

ENGINE

Model VG33EType Gasoline, 4-cycleCylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V slanted at 60°Bore × Stroke in (mm) 3.602 × 3.274 (91.5 × 83.0)Displacement cu in (cm3) 199.84 (3,275)Firing order 1,2,3,4,5,6* (See illustration below)Idle speed rpm

See the ‘‘Important Vehicle Information’’ label on the underside of the hood.Ignition timing degree (B.T.D.C.)at idle speed degree/rpmCO percentage at idle speed[No air] %Spark plug

Hot PFR4G-11Standard PFR5G-11Cold PFR6G-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal): 0.043 in. (1.1mm)Camshaft operation Timing belt** (See note below)

**NOTE: Periodic maintenance is necessary. Refer to the appropriate periodicmaintenance schedule in the ‘‘NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.’’

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of theCanadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS


Z X

Model VG33EDrive belts[Width × Length] in (mm)

Generator belt 0.7008 × 33.66 (17.80 × 855)Air conditioner compressor 0.5606 × 46.65 (14.24 × 1,185)Power steering pump 0.5606 × 40.74 (14.24 × 1,035)


Z X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels Steel 5.5JJ × 15

Aluminum 6J × 16

Offset in (mm) 1.77 (45)

Tire size Steel P215/70R15

Aluminum P215/65R16

Aluminum P225/60R16

Spare tires T135/90D16P215/70R15

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 194.8 (4,949)

Overall width in (mm) 74.9 (1,903)

Overall height in (mm) 67.3 (1,710)

Front tread in (mm) 63.4 (1,610)

Rear tread in (mm) 63.4 (1,610)

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850)

Gross vehicle weightrating lb (kg)

See the ‘‘F.M.V.S.S. certification label’’on the left center pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)


Z X

When planning to travel in another coun-try, you should first find out if the fuelavailable is suitable for your vehicle’s en-gine.Using fuel with an octane/cetane rating thatis too low may cause engine damage. Allgasoline vehicles must be operated withunleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriate fuelis not available.When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessary tomodify the vehicle to meet local laws andregulations.The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standards varyaccording to the country, state, province ordistrict. Therefore, vehicle specificationsmay differ.When any vehicle is to be taken intoanother country, state, province or dis-trict and registered, its modifications,transportation, and registration are theresponsibility of the user. NISSAN is notresponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number plate isattached to the upper portion of the dash-board on the driver’s side. This number isthe identification for your vehicle and isused in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (Chassis number)

ATI0563 ATI1021

WHEN TRAVELING ORREGISTERING YOUR VEHICLEIN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


Z X

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATIONLABELThe F.M.V.S.S. certification label is affixedas shown. This label contains valuable ve-hicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manu-facture, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label isattached as shown.

ATI0550 ATI1022 WTI0017


Z X

TIRE PLACARDThe cold tire pressure is shown on the tireplacard affixed to the inside of the glovebox.

AIR CONDITIONERSPECIFICATION LABELThe air conditioner specification label isattached as shown.

Have your front license plate installed byyour NISSAN dealer.

ATI0561 WTI0018

ATI0564

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSEPLATE


Z X

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside the vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these ar-eas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.


● Be sure everyone in the vehicle is in aseat with their seat belt properly fas-tened.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with thefollowing terms before loading your vehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-hicle) - vehicle weight including: standardand optional equipment, fluids, emergencytools, and spare tire assembly. This weightdoes not include passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight of pas-sengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

maximum total weight (load) limit speci-fied for the vehicle.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specified forthe front or rear axle.

● Gross combined weight - GVW plus thetotal weight of the trailer and all its cargo.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOADCAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is deter-mined by weight, not by available cargospace. For example, a luggage rack, bikecarrier, cartop carrier or similar equipmentdoes not increase load carrying capacity ofyour vehicle.

To determine vehicle load capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by usinga commercial-grade scale, found at placessuch as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grainelevator, or a scrap metal recycling facility.

1) Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2) Compare the curb weight amount to theGVWR specified for your vehicle to de-termine how much more weight yourvehicle can carry.

3) After loading (cargo & passengers), re-weigh your vehicle to determine if eitherGVWR or GAWR for your vehicle isexceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, re-move cargo as necessary. If either thefront or rear GAWR is exceeded, shiftthe load or remove cargo as necessary.

LOADING TIPS● The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR specified on the F.M.V.S.S. Cer-tification Label.

● Do not load the front and rear axle to theGAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

VEHICLE LOADINGINFORMATION


Z X

● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts ofyour vehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. This could re-sult in loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading can shorten the life ofthe vehicle. Failures caused by over-loading are not covered by the vehi-cle’s warranty.

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo.Remember that towing a trailer places ad-ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only)contains information on your vehicle’s trailertowing ability and the special equipmentrequired, and may be obtained from anauthorized NISSAN dealer.

Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is a cargovan model.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMTS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed3,500 lbs (1,588 kg). The total trailer loadequals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.Towing loads greater than 3,500 lbs (1,588kg) or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling,braking and performance.

● All towing above 1,000 lbs (454 kg) re-quires the use of trailer brakes.

● NISSAN recommends the use of a tan-dem axle trailer whenever towing above3,000 lbs (1,361 kg).

● A sway control device is recommendedfor all towing above 2,000 lbs (907 kg).Sway control devices are not offered byNISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitchoutlet for a properly designed sway con-trol device for your trailer.

The Gross Combined Weight should notexceed 8,000 lbs (3,628 kg). The GrossCombined Weight is the total weight of thetow vehicle with all occupants, cargo andfuel tanks, PLUS the total weight of thetrailer and all its cargo. This weight should

TI1011M

TOWING A TRAILER


Z X

be properly distributed. For more informa-tion regarding vehicle and trailer loading,refer to The NISSAN Towing Guide, avail-able from an authorized NISSAN dealer.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer isnot only related to the maximum trailerloads, but also the places you plan to tow.Tow weights appropriate for level highwaydriving may have to be reduced on verysteep grades or in low traction situations (forexample, on slippery boat ramps).

WARNING

Vehicle damage and/or personal injuryresulting from improper towing proce-dures are not covered by NISSAN war-ranties. A NISSAN Trailer Towing Guide(U.S. only) containing information ontrailer towing ability and the specialequipment may be obtained from anauthorized NISSAN dealer.

Tongue load:Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11%of the total trailer load. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange cargo to al-low for proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towingvehicle must not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) shown on theF.M.V.S.S. certification label. The gross ve-hicle weight equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any otheroptional equipment. In addition, front or reargross axle weight must not exceed thegross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown onthe F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUMTOWING LOAD

3,500 (1,588)

MAXIMUMTONGUE LOAD

350 (159)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitchChoose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch isavailable from your NISSAN dealer (USAonly). Make sure the trailer hitch is securelyattached to the vehicle to help avoid per-sonal injury or property damage due tosway caused by crosswinds, rough roadsurfaces or passing trucks.

CAUTION● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.● The hitch should not be attached to

or affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

TI1012M


Z X

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaustsystem, brake system, etc. to installa trailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of addi-tional damage if your vehicle isstruck from the rear, where practical,remove the hitch and/or receiverwhen not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal thebolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes,water or dust from entering the pas-senger compartment.

● Regularly check that all hitch mount-ing bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicletires to the recommended cold tire pres-sure indicated on the tire placard (locatedon the inside of the glove box lid).

● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be inaccordance with the trailer and tiremanufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. Safety chainsshould be crossed and should be attachedto the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper oraxle. Be sure to leave enough slack in thechains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights

Trailer lights should comply with Federaland/or local regulations. When wiring thevehicle for towing, connect the stop and taillight pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit.

Class I Trailer Tow electrical wiring providestwo circuits (right and left hand) to operatetrailer stop/turn tail lamps. Each individualstop/turn circuit will operate only one com-bination stop/turn light bulb (#1157, 3157,2357, or 3357) on the trailer. Never addmore than one trailer light bulb to onecircuit.


Z X

Trailer tow harness and module(if so equipped)

The trailer tow module on your vehicle al-lows turn/stop lamp control of a trailer beingtowed by your NISSAN.

The trailer tow module includes:

● trailer tow module which draws powerfrom the vehicle stop lamp fuse

● one subharness containing a SAE J1239specified connector

To use the tow harness:

1) Remove the connector cap from thevehicle harness, located behind the rearbumper. Store the connector cap in ve-hicle glove box for reinstallation.

2) Connect the tow harness to the vehicleharness located behind the rear bumper.

3) Connect the tow harness connector(SAE J1239) to your trailer.

4) Confirm proper vehicle and trailerstop/turn lamp operation.

5) When towing is completed, disconnectthe tow harness from the trailer and thevehicle. Store the tow harness in theglove box. Reinstall the connector cap tothe vehicle harness.

If you need further assistance in wiringa trailer to your NISSAN, contact an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

Always confirm proper vehicle andtrailer stop/turn lamp operation everytime the trailer light circuits are con-nected for use.

ATI0555


Z X

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to Federaland/or local regulations and it is properlyinstalled.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake systemdirectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicleif it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes of either condi-tion.

● Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

● Be certain your rear view mirrors conformto all federal, state or local regulations. Ifnot, install any mirrors required for towingbefore driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understandingof the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-tice turning, stopping and backing up in anarea which is free from traffic. Steering,stability, and braking performance aresomewhat different than under normal driv-ing conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, ifyou must do so, first block the wheelsand apply the parking brake, and thenmove the transmission shift selector le-ver into the P (Park) position. If you movethe shift selector lever to the P (Park)position before blocking the wheels andapplying the parking brake, transmissiondamage could occur.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lower

gear and use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshiftthe transmission to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances of en-gine overloading and/or overheating.

● If the engine coolant rises to an ex-tremely high temperature when the airconditioning system is on, turn the airconditioner off. Coolant heat can be ad-ditionally vented by opening the win-dows, switching the fan control dial tohigh and setting the temperature controldial to the WARM position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500miles (800 km) of the vehicle’s life.

● Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified in the recom-mended Maintenance Schedule in the‘‘NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide’’.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turn thanyour vehicle wheels. To compensate forthis, make a larger than normal turningradius during the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads adversely


Z X

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possiblycausing vehicle sway. When beingpassed by larger vehicles, be preparedfor possible changes in crosswinds thatcould affect vehicle handling. If swayingdoes occur, firmly grip the steeringwheel, steer straight ahead, and immedi-ately (but gradually) reduce vehiclespeed. This combination helps to stabi-lize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than normalpassing. Remember the length of thetrailer must also pass the other vehiclebefore you can safely change lanes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiencyand electrical charging performance, donot use overdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

When towing a trailer, change fluid in thetransmission more frequently. For addi-tional information see the ‘‘NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide.’’

Department of Transportation (DOT) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on tire wear rate when tested undercontrolled conditions on specified govern-ment test courses. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half(1-1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. However,relative tire performance depends on actualdriving conditions, and may vary signifi-cantly, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled condi-tions, on specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to your ve-hicle tires is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hydro-planing, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent a tire’s resistance toheat build-up, and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature cancause tire material to degenerate, reducingtire life. Excessive temperatures can lead tosudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds toa performance level which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Aand B represent higher levels of perfor-mance on laboratory test wheels than theminimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADING


Z X

WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, under inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combi-nation, can cause heat build-up andpossible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For US

1) Emission Defects Warranty

2) Emission Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be foundwith other vehicle warranties in your War-ranty Information Booklet that comes withyour NISSAN. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it has be-come lost, you may obtain a replacement bywriting to:

● Nissan North America Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be foundwith other vehicle warranties in your War-ranty Information Booklet that comes withyour NISSAN. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it has be-come lost, you may obtain a replacement bywriting to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEM WARRANTY


Z X

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to no-tifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at (888) 327-4236. If you reside in Hawaii, please call(808) 836-0888. You may also write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transporta-tion, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

In Hawaii, call (808) 836-0888.

Due to legal requirements in some statesand Canadian Provinces, your vehicle maybe required to be in the ready condition foran Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theemission control system.

The vehicle is set to the ready conditionwhen it is driven through certain driving pat-terns. Usually, the ready condition can beobtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repairedor the battery is disconnected, the vehiclemay be reset to a not ready condition. Beforetaking the I/M test, drive the vehicle throughthe following pattern to set the vehicle to theready condition. If you cannot or do not wantto perform the driving pattern, an authorizedNISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNINGAlways drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to trafficconditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C.Allow the engine to idle until the gaugeneedle points between the C and H (nor-mal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the accelera-tor pedal completely and keep it releasedfor at least 6 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fora moment, then drive the vehicle at aspeed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h)for at least 5 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 mph (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps four through five at leastthree times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 mph (88km/h) and maintain the speed for at least3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle (shift lever in the ‘‘P’’ or‘‘N’’ position).

9. Rev the engine up between 2,500 and3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutiveminutes, then release the acceleratorpedal completely.

10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.

11. Rev the engine up between 2,000 and

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTS (US only)

READINESS FORINSPECTION/MAINTENANCE(I/M) TEST (US only)


Z X

3,000 rpm and maintain it for 5 consecu-tive minutes.

12. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off.

13. Repeat steps one through twelve atleast one more time.

If steps one through seven are interrupted,repeat the preceding step. Any safe drivingmode is acceptable between steps. Do notstop the engine until step seven is com-pleted.


Z X

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is thebest source of service and repair informa-tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiring dia-grams, illustrations and step-by-step diag-nostic and adjustment procedures, thismanual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at authorizedNISSAN dealerships. Also available aregenuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, andgenuine NISSAN Service and Owner’sManuals for older NISSAN models.

In the USA:For current pricing and availability of genu-ine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-639-8841www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genu-ine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999model year and prior, see an authorizedNISSAN dealer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genu-ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for the 2002

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


Z X

model year and prior, see an authorizedNISSAN dealer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville OH 441361-800-247-5321

In Canada:To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSANService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact your nearest NISSAN Dealer. For thephone number and location of a NISSANDealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfac-tion Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingualNISSAN representative will assist you.Also available are Genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSANmodels.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In thisunlikely event, there is some important in-formation you should know.

Many insurance companies routinely autho-rize the use of non-genuine collision parts inorder to cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of GenuineNISSAN Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored usingparts made to NISSAN’s original exactingspecifications - if you want to help it to lastand hold its resale value, the solution issimple. Tell your insurance agent andyour repair shop to only use GenuineNISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does notwarrant non-NISSAN parts, nor doesNISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help pro-tect your personal safety, preserve yourwarranty protection and maintain the resalevalue of your vehicle. And if your vehiclewas leased, using Genuine NISSAN Partsmay prevent or limit unnecessary excesswear and tear expenses at the end of yourlease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumplezones to minimize the risk that the hood willpenetrate the windshield of your vehicle inan accident. Non-genuine (imitation) partsmay not provide such built in safeguards.Also, non-genuine parts often show prema-ture wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used torepair your vehicle. And some states haveenacted laws that restrict insurance compa-nies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new ve-hicle warranty. These laws help protect you,so you can take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visitus at: www.nissandriven.com.


Z X

10 Index

A

AccidentInertia fuel shut-off switch .................... 6-11

After an accident........................................ 6-11Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) ...................................................... 1-31Air bag warning light.................................. 1-37Air cleaner housing filter............................ 8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ........................ 4-5Air conditioner service .......................... 4-15Air conditioner specification label ......... 9-12Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubrication recommendations.................. 9-6Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped)..................................... 4-11Heater and air conditioner (manual)....... 4-3Rear seat air conditioner ...................... 4-14

Air flow charts .............................................. 4-7Alarm system (See vehicle securitysystem) ...................................................... 2-12Anti-lock brake system (ABS).................... 5-14Anti-lock brake warning light ..................... 2-10Armrests..................................................... 1-11Ashtray (See cigarette lighter andashtray) ...................................................... 2-23

Audio systemCompact disc (CD) player........... 4-30, 4-32FM-AM radio with cassette player........ 4-20FM-AM radio with cassette player andcompact disc (CD) player ..................... 4-26

Autolamp switch......................................... 2-18Automatic

Automatic power window switch .......... 2-31Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-12Driving with automatic transmission....... 5-6Transmission selector lever lockrelease .................................................... 5-7

B

Battery........................................................ 8-14Battery replacement (See remote keylessentry system) ............................................... 3-8Before starting the engine ........................... 5-5Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .............. 5-14Brake booster ....................................... 8-22Brake fluid ..................................... 8-13, 9-2Brake light (See stop light) ................... 8-27Brake pedal .......................................... 8-21Brake system........................................ 5-14Brake warning light ................................. 2-9Brake wear indicators........................... 2-12

Parking brake check............................. 8-21Parking brake operation ......................... 5-9Self-adjusting brakes ............................ 8-21

Break-in schedule ...................................... 5-11Bulb check/instrument panel ....................... 2-8Bulb replacement....................................... 8-27

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...................................................... 9-2Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-46Cargo net ................................................... 2-27Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ... 9-13Check engine indicator light(See malfunction indicator light) ................ 2-11Child restraint with top tether strap ........... 1-68Child restraints........................................... 1-54Child safety sliding door lock....................... 3-5Cigarette lighter (accessory) and ashtray .. 2-23Cleaning exterior and interior ...................... 7-2Clock................................................. 4-21, 4-27Cold weather driving.................................. 5-16Compact disc (CD) player................ 4-30, 4-32Controls

Audio controls (rear) ............................. 4-35Audio controls (steering wheel) ............ 4-34

Z X

Heater and air conditioner controls(automatic)............................................ 4-11Heater and air conditioner controls(manual).................................................. 4-3Rear seat air conditioner ...................... 4-14

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................ 9-2Changing engine coolant........................ 8-9Checking engine coolant level ............... 8-8Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-6

Cornering light ........................................... 2-19Corrosion protection .................................... 7-4Cruise control............................................. 5-10Cup holders ............................................... 2-25

D

Daytime running light system (Canadaonly) ........................................................... 2-17Defogger switch

Rear window defogger switch .............. 2-16Dimensions and weights.............................. 9-9Door locks.................................................... 3-2Door open warning light .............................. 2-9Drive belts.................................................. 8-16Driving

Cold weather driving............................. 5-16Driving with automatic transmission....... 5-6Precautions when starting and driving ... 5-2

E

Economy - fuel........................................... 5-12Emission control information label............. 9-11Emission control system warranty............. 9-20Engine

Before starting the engine ...................... 5-5Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................ 9-2Changing engine coolant........................ 8-9Changing engine oil.............................. 8-10Changing engine oil filter...................... 8-11Checking engine coolant level ............... 8-8Checking engine oil level ....................... 8-9Engine compartment check locations .... 8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-6Engine cooling system ........................... 8-8Engine oil ................................................ 8-9Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation ..................................... 9-4Engine oil pressure warning light ........... 2-8Engine oil viscosity ................................. 9-5Engine serial number ........................... 9-11Starting the engine ................................. 5-5

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)................. 5-2

F

Family entertainment system..................... 4-37Five passenger seating ............................. 1-28Five passenger seating with cargo room .. 1-29

Flashers (See hazard warning flasherswitch)........................................................ 2-19Flat tire......................................................... 6-2Flexible seating.......................................... 1-12Floor mat positioning........................ 1-27, 1-30Floor mat positioning aid ........................... 1-30Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-12Brake fluid ..................................... 8-13, 9-2Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................ 9-2Engine coolant........................................ 8-8Engine oil ................................................ 8-9Power steering fluid ...................... 8-13, 9-2Window washer fluid ............................ 8-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..................... 9-11Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................ 9-2Fuel economy ....................................... 5-12Fuel filler lid and cap ............................ 3-10Fuel filler lid lock opener lever ............. 3-10Fuel gauge.............................................. 2-6Fuel octane rating................................... 9-3Fuel recommendation............................. 9-2Inertia fuel shut-off switch .................... 6-11

Fuses ......................................................... 8-22

10-2

Z X

G

GaugeEngine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-6Fuel gauge.............................................. 2-6Odometer................................................ 2-5Speedometer .......................................... 2-5Tachometer............................................. 2-5

General maintenance ........................... 8-2, 8-3Glove box................................................... 2-26

H

Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-19Head restraints .......................................... 1-10Headlight control switch............................. 2-16Headlights .................................................. 8-25Heated seats.............................................. 2-20Heater

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped)..................................... 4-11Heater and air conditioner (manual)....... 4-3Rear seat air conditioner ...................... 4-14

Homelink TransceiverHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver(If so equipped) .................................... 2-35

Hood release ............................................... 3-9Horn ........................................................... 2-20

I

Ignition switch .............................................. 5-4Important vehicle information label............ 9-11Increasing fuel economy............................ 5-12Indicator lights and chimes (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) ....... 2-8Inertia fuel shut-off switch.......................... 6-11Instrument brightness control .................... 2-17Integrated child safety seats...................... 1-73Interior lights .............................................. 2-34

J

Jump starting...................................... 6-8, 8-15

K

Key............................................................... 3-2Keyless entry system (See remote keylessentry system) ............................................... 3-6

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label ......... 9-12Emission control information label........ 9-11Engine serial number ........................... 9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label ................ 9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) ...... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate ...................................................... 9-10Warning labels (for SRS) ..................... 1-37

License plateInstalling the license plate .................... 9-12

LightAir bag warning light............................. 1-37Brake light (See stop light) ................... 8-27Bulb check/instrument panel .................. 2-8Bulb replacement.................................. 8-27Cornering light ...................................... 2-19Headlight control switch ....................... 2-16Headlights............................................. 8-25Interior lights ......................................... 2-34Light bulbs ............................................ 8-25Luggage compartment lights ................ 2-34Spotlights (See map light) .................... 2-35Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders................................................ 2-8

LockChild safety sliding door lock ................. 3-5Door locks............................................... 3-2Fuel filler lid lock opener lever ............. 3-10Power door locks ............................ 3-2, 3-4Rear door lock ...................................... 3-10

Luggage compartment lights ..................... 2-34Luggage rack ............................................. 2-30Luggage (See vehicle loadinginformation) ................................................ 9-13

10-3

Z X

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance...................... 8-2, 8-3Maintenance precautions ....................... 8-5Seat belt maintenance.......................... 1-54Under the hood and vehicle ................... 8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ............... 2-11Manual front seat adjustment ...................... 1-3Manual vent windows ................................ 2-32Map lights .................................................. 2-35Map pocket ................................................ 2-24Mirror

Outside mirrors ..................................... 3-14Vanity mirror ......................................... 3-12

Multi-remote control system (See remotekeyless entry system) .................................. 3-6

O

Odometer ..................................................... 2-5Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................ 9-2Changing engine oil.............................. 8-10Changing engine oil filter...................... 8-11Checking engine oil level ....................... 8-9Engine oil ................................................ 8-9Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation ..................................... 9-4Engine oil viscosity ................................. 9-5

Outside mirrors .......................................... 3-14Overdrive switch .......................................... 5-8Overheat

If your vehicle overheats ...................... 6-10Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation ................................................. 9-23

P

Parcel Shelf ............................................... 2-28Parking

Parking brake check............................. 8-21Parking brake operation ......................... 5-9Parking/parking on hills ........................ 5-13

Personal reading light................................ 2-34Power

Power door locks ............................ 3-2, 3-4Power steering fluid ...................... 8-13, 9-2Power support front seat ........................ 1-4Power vent windows............................. 2-32Power windows..................................... 2-30

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions ....................... 8-5Precautions on seat belt usage............ 1-39Precautions when starting and driving ... 5-2

Push starting.............................................. 6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio ......................... 4-46

FM-AM radio with cassette player........ 4-20FM-AM radio with cassette player andcompact disc (CD) player ..................... 4-26

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test..................................................... 9-21Rear door................................................... 3-10Rear door lock ........................................... 3-10Rear power socket..................................... 2-22Rear seat air conditioner ........................... 4-14Rear window defogger switch ................... 2-16Rear window wiper and washerswitches ..................................................... 2-16Refrigerant recommendation ....................... 9-6Registering your vehicle in anothercountry ....................................................... 9-10Remote keyless entry system .................... 3-6Removing and installing the second rowbench seat ................................................. 1-12Reporting safety defects (USA)................. 9-21

S

SafetyChild safety sliding door lock ................. 3-5Reporting safety defects (USA)............ 9-21

Seat beltPrecautions on seat belt usage............ 1-39Seat belt extenders .............................. 1-53Seat belt maintenance.......................... 1-54Seat belts.............................................. 1-39Three-point type with retractor .... 1-42, 1-45Two-point type without retractor ........... 1-51

10-4

Z X

Seat belt warning light ................................. 2-9Seat positions ............................................ 1-20Seating arrangements ............................... 1-19Seats

Five passenger seating ........................ 1-28Five passenger seating with cargoroom...................................................... 1-29Flexible seating..................................... 1-12Heated seats ........................................ 2-20Integrated child safety seats ................ 1-73Manual front seat adjustment................. 1-3Power support front seat ........................ 1-4Seat positions ....................................... 1-20Second row bench seat........................ 1-20Second row bucket seats ..................... 1-24Seven passenger seating..................... 1-27Sliding three-passenger seat.................. 1-7Three-passenger bench seat in fullyforward position .................................... 1-29Three-passenger bench seat instorage position .................................... 1-27

Seats/floor mats......................................... 1-19Self-adjusting brakes ................................. 8-21Seven passenger seating .......................... 1-27Shift lock release ......................................... 5-7Shifting

Automatic transmission .......................... 5-7Sliding three-passenger seat....................... 1-7Spark plug replacement............................. 8-16Speedometer ............................................... 2-5Spotlights (See map light) ......................... 2-35SRS warning label ..................................... 1-37

StartingBefore starting the engine ...................... 5-5Jump starting................................. 6-8, 8-15Precautions when starting and driving ... 5-2Push starting......................................... 6-10Starting the engine ................................. 5-5

SteeringPower steering fluid ...................... 8-13, 9-2Tilting steering wheel............................ 3-11

Stop light.................................................... 8-27Storage

Overhead storage compartment........... 2-24Under seat storage tray........................ 1-11

Sun shade.................................................. 2-33Sunroof ...................................................... 2-33Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels ............ 1-37Switch

Autolamp switch ................................... 2-18Automatic power window switch .......... 2-31Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 2-19Headlight control switch ....................... 2-16Ignition switch ......................................... 5-4Overdrive switch ..................................... 5-8Rear window defogger switch .............. 2-16Rear window wiper and washerswitches ................................................ 2-16Turn signal switch................................. 2-19Windshield wiper and washer switch ... 2-15

T

Tabletop seats ........................................... 1-18Tachometer.................................................. 2-5Three-passenger bench seat..................... 1-50Three-passenger bench seat in fullyforward position ......................................... 1-29Three-passenger bench seat in storageposition....................................................... 1-27Three-way catalyst....................................... 5-2Tilting steering wheel................................. 3-11Timing belt ................................................... 9-7Tire

Flat tire.................................................... 6-2Spare tire .............................................. 8-35Tire chains ............................................ 8-33Tire placard........................................... 9-12Tire pressure ........................................ 8-31Tire rotation .......................................... 8-33Tool kit .................................................... 6-3Types of tires........................................ 8-32Uniform tire quality grading .................. 9-19Wheels and tires ........................... 8-31, 9-9Wheel/tire size ........................................ 9-9

TowingTow truck towing .................................. 6-12Towing load/specification chart ............ 9-15Trailer towing ........................................ 9-14

10-5

Z X

TransmissionAutomatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-12Driving with automatic transmission....... 5-6Selector lever lock release ..................... 5-7

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country)......................................... 9-10Turn signal switch...................................... 2-19

U

Under seat storage tray............................. 1-11Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-19

V

Vanity mirror .............................................. 3-12Vehicle dimensions and weights ................. 9-9Vehicle identification .................................. 9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) ........... 9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN)(chassis number) ....................................... 9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .. 9-10Vehicle loading information ....................... 9-13Vehicle recovery ........................................ 6-14Vehicle security system............................. 2-12Ventilators .................................................... 4-2

W

WarningAir bag warning light............................. 1-37Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 2-19Vehicle security system........................ 2-12Warning labels (for SRS) ..................... 1-37Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders................................................ 2-8

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ...... 9-9Wheels and tires ................................ 8-31, 9-9Wheel/tire size ............................................. 9-9When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country...................................... 9-10Window washer fluid.................................. 8-14Windows

Locking passengers’ windows.............. 2-31Manual vent windows ........................... 2-32Power vent windows............................. 2-32Power windows..................................... 2-30

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-15Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches ................................................ 2-16Windshield wiper and washer switch ... 2-15Wiper blades......................................... 8-19

10-6

Z X

Recommended fuel:Unleaded gasoline, at least 87 AKI number(RON 91).For further details such as gasohol, see‘‘Fuel recommendation’’ in the ‘‘Technicaland consumer information’’ section.

Recommended engine oil:● API Certification Mark● API SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or

API grade SJ Energy Conserving● ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II● 5W - 30 viscosity preferredSee ‘‘Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion’’ in the ‘‘Technical and consumer infor-mation’’ section.

Cold tire pressure:See tire placard affixed to the glove com-partment lid.

Recommended new vehiclebreak-in procedure:During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendationsoutlined in the “Break-in schedule’’ informa-tion found in the “Starting and Driving” sec-tion of this Owner’s Manual. Follow theserecommendations for the future reliabilityand economy of your new vehicle.

WGS0010

GAS STATION INFORMATION QUICK REFERENCE

Z X

2002 quest owner's manual

Automotive

vehicle weight

world of nissan nissan

nissan dealership

nissan design america

nissan north america

greatyour new nissan

nissan ser alcohol

nissan employs cian